Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutCCC Rm 330D Reno Specs 1.29.19  CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714        TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 1     TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS SECTION 02 41 19 – SELECTIVE DEMOLITION DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 04 - MASONRY NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 05 - METALS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 06 - WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07 92 19 – ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS SECTION 08 12 13 – HOLLOW METAL FRAMES SECTION 08 14 16 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS SECTION 08 71 00 – DOOR HARDWARE SECTION 08 80 00 – GLAZING DIVISION 09 - FINISHES SECTION 09 01 90.52 – MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SECTION 09 22 16 – NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING SECTION 09 29 00 – GYPSUM BOARD SECTION 09 51 13 – ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS SECTION 09 65 13 – RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES SECTION 09 91 23 – INTERIOR PAINTING DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES NOT APPLICABLE  CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714        TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 2     DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 21 - FIRE SUPPRESSION SECTION 21 13 13 – WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING NOT APPLICABLE DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC) SECTION 23 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 53 – IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT SECTION 23 05 93 – TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC SECTION 23 07 13 – INSULATION AND LAGGING SECTION 23 09 23 – BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM SECTION 23 09 25 – BACS COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY SECTION 23 31 13 – METAL DUCTS SECTION 23 33 00 – AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES SECTION 23 36 00 – AIR TERMINAL UNITS SECTION 23 37 13 – DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL SECTION 26 05 29 – HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS SECTION 26 09 23 – LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES SECTION 26 10 00 – BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS SECTION 26 51 00 – LIGHTING FIXTURES DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS SECTION 27 15 00 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING  CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714        TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC - 3     DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY NOT APPLICABLE CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 1 SECTION 02 41 19 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 10 00 "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owner - occupancy requirements, and phasing requirements. 2. Section 01 73 29 "Cutting, Patching, and Repairing" for cutting and patching procedures. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled. B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner. C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated. D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled. 1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor. 1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 2 1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished. 2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure. 3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials, demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed by selective demolition operations. 5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures proposed for protecting individuals and property, for dust control, and for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers. B. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following: 1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending dates for each activity. Ensure Owner's on-site operations are uninterrupted. 2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted. 3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services. 4. Use of elevator and stairs. 5. Coordination of Owner's continuing occupancy of portions of existing building and of Owner's partial occupancy of completed Work. C. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start of demolition. D. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition ar ea. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted. B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical. 1. Before selective demolition, Owner will remove the following items : a. Furniture. b. Computers and other equipment. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 3 C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition. D. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work. 1. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract. E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted. F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations. 1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations. B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required. C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect. D. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction photographs. 1. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 32 33 "Photographic Documentation." CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 4 2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide photographs of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by salvage operations. 3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage. 1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 01 10 00 "Summary." B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indica ted utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished. 1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building. 3. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, a nd components indicated to be removed. a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material. b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material. c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, r econnect, and make equipment operational. e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner. f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material. C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Comply with the requirements of Section 01 35 45 "Refrigerant Compliance." 3.3 PREPARATION A. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 5 1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and to and from occupied portions of building. 2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demo lition of existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage and damage to structure and interior areas. 3. Protect walls, ceilings, floors, and other existing finish work that are to remain or that are exposed during selective demolition operations. 4. Cover and protect furniture, furnishings, and equipment that have not been removed. 5. Comply with requirements for temporary enclosures, dust control, heating, and cooling specified in Section 01 50 00 "Temporary Facilities and Controls." B. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished. 1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition. 3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows: 1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to dama ge construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain. 2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces. 3. Do not use cutting torches in the work area . Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management." B. Removed and Salvaged Items: 1. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 2. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. C. Removed and Reinstalled Items: 1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 02 41 19 - 6 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated. D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete. 3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS A. Concrete: Demolish in small sections. Using power-driven saw, cut concrete to a depth of at least ¾ inch at junctures with construction to remain. Dislodge concrete from reinforcement at perimeter of areas being demolished, cut reinforcement, and then remove remainder of concrete. Neatly trim openings to dimensions indicated. B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain, using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts. C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and remove. D. Resilient Floor Coverings: Remove floor coverings and adhesive according to recommendations in RFCI's "Recommended Work Practices for the Removal of Resilient Floor Coverings." Do not use methods requir ing solvent-based adhesive strippers. 3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Proj ect site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill. 1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Comply with requirements specified in Section 01 74 00 "Construction Waste Management." 4. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials. 3.7 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began. END OF SECTION 02 41 19 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 1 SECTION 07 92 19 - ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical joint sealants. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 00 "Joint Sealants" for elastomeric, latex, and butyl-rubber-based joint sealants for nonacoustical applications. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each acoustical joint sealant. 1. Include VOC content. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of acoustical joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in ½-inch-wide joints formed between two 6-inch-long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants. D. Acoustical-Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint-sealant formulation. 4. Joint-sealant color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For each kind of acoustical joint sealant, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical joint-sealant products that effectively reduce airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 2.2 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex acoustical sealant complying with ASTM C 834. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hilti, Inc. CP 506 Smoke and Acoustic Sealant, or comparable product by one of the following: a. Accumetric LLC. b. GE Construction Sealants. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco, Incorporated. 2. Colors of Exposed Acoustical Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SPRAYS A. Acoustic Spray for Concealed Joints: Provide manufacturer's standard sprayable latex material complying with ASTM C919 and the following: 1. Sound Transmission Performance: Spray effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through head-of-wall joints in building construction, as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 90. 2. Movement Capability: 12.5 percent. 3. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Hilti, Inc.; CP 572 Smoke and Acoustic Spray. 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Unfaced, Mineral-Wool Batt: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of rock wool fibers; with maximum flame-spread index of 0 and smoke-developed index of 0, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 3 B. Primer: Material recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates. C. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. D. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive acoustical joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of t he Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing acoustical joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's writte n instructions. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by acoustical-joint-sealant manufacturer. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Comply with acoustical joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent r equirements apply. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS 07 92 19 - 4 B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical joint sealant. Install acoustical joint sealants at both faces of partitions, at perimeters, and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919, ASTM C 1193, and manufacturer's written recommendations for closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions to underside of floor slabs above acoustical ceilings. C. Install acoustical sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealant and spray during application in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. D. Install acoustic sealant and spray free of air pockets, embedded foreign matter, sags, and ridges. E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess acoustical sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Remove excess acoustical spray from surfaces adjacent to joint, as indicated on Drawings. 3. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 4. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated. F. Acoustical Ceiling Areas: Apply acoustical joint sealant at perimeter edge moldings of acoustical ceiling areas in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of acoustical joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. 3.5 PROTECTION A. Protect acoustical joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contami nating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out, remove, and re pair damaged or deteriorated acoustical joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. END OF SECTION 07 92 19 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 1 SECTION 08 12 13 - HOLLOW METAL FRAMES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior custom hollow-metal frames. 2. Borrowed lites. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware" for door hardware for doors in hollow-metal frames. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings accord ing to NAAMM-HMMA 803 or SDI A250.8. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate anchorage installation for hollow-metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. B. Coordinate requirements for installation of door hardware. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each frame type. 2. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 3. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 2 4. Details of each different wall opening condition. 5. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 6. Details of accessories. 7. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. C. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver hollow-metal frames palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units. B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Store hollow-metal frames vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum ¼-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Ceco Door; ASSA ABLOY. 2. Curries Company; ASSA AB LOY. 3. Custom Metal Products. 4. DE LA FONTAINE. 5. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 6. North American Door Corp. 7. Pioneer Industries. 8. Republic Doors and Frames. 9. Steelcraft; an Allegion brand. 2.2 CUSTOM HOLLOW -METAL FRAMES A. Interior Frames: NAAMM-HMMA 861. 1. Materials: Uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 3 2. Sidelite and Transom Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. 3. Construction: Full profile welded. 4. Exposed Finish: Prime. 2.3 BORROWED LITES A. Fabricate of uncoated steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. B. Construction: Full profile welded. C. Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as metal as frames. D. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 2.4 FRAME ANCHORS A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Type: Anchors of minimum size and type required by applicable door and frame standard, and suitable for performance level indicated. 2. Quantity: Minimum of three anchors per jamb, with one additional anchor for frames with no floor anchor. Provide one additional anchor for each 24 inches of frame height above 7 feet. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Anchor: Minimum ⅜-inch-diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts, with manufacturer's standard pipe spacer. B. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor. C. Material: ASTM A 879/A 879M, Commercial Steel (CS), 04Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M; hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B. 2.5 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 4 C. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M. D. Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow-metal frames of type indicated. E. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing." 2.6 FABRICATION A. Hollow-Metal Frames: Fabricate in one piece except where handling and shipping limitations require multiple sections. Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of metal of same or greater thickness as frames. 1. Sidelite and Transom Bar Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by welding. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Door Silencers: Except on sound-stripped frames, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers. B. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow-metal frames to receive templated mortised hardware, and electrical wiring; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to SDI A250.6, the Door Hardware Schedule, and templates. 1. Reinforce frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 2. Comply with BHMA A156.115 for preparing hollow-metal frames for hardware. C. Glazed Lites: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside and loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow-metal frames. 3. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with glazing and installation types indicated. 4. Provide stops for installation with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner. 2.7 STEEL FINISHES A. Prime Finish: Clean, pretreat, and apply manufacturer's standard primer. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 5 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with SDI A250.10; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smoot h, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Drill and tap frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow-metal frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place. Comply with approved Shop Drawings and with manufacturer's written instructions. Comply with NAAMM-HMMA 840. B. Set frames accurately in position; plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces without damage to completed Work. 1. Where frames are fabricated in sections, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and ma ke splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch-up finishes. 2. Install frames with removable stops located on secure side of opening. C. Floor Anchors: Secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. 1. Floor anchors may be set with power-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. D. Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation inside frames. E. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. F. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow-metal frames to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES 08 12 13 - 6 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor. G. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 80 00 "Glazing" and with hollow- metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.3 CLEANING AND TOUCHUP A. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer. END OF SECTION 08 12 13 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 1 SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Five-ply flush wood veneer-faced doors for transparent finish. 2. Factory finishing flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 14 33 "Stile and Rail Wood Doors" for wood doors with full glass lights. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product, including the following: 1. Door core materials and construction. 2. Door edge construction 3. Door face type and characteristics. 4. Factory-machining criteria. 5. Factory-finishing specifications. 6. For adhesives, indicate that product contains no urea formaldehyde. 7. For composite wood products, indicate that product contains no urea formaldehyde. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each type of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following: 1. Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, and swing. 2. Door elevations, dimension and locations of hardware. 3. Details of electrical raceway and preparation for electrified hardware, access control systems, and security systems. 4. Dimensions and locations of blocking for hardware attachment. 5. Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 6. Clearances and undercuts. 7. Doors to be factory finished and application requirements. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 2 C. Samples for Initial Selection: For factory-finished doors. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenc ed standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons. C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at levels designed for building occupants for the remainder of construction period. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Delamination of veneer. b. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than ¼ inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. c. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI/AWMAC/WI's "Architectural Woodwork Standards." 1. The Contract Documents contain requirements that are more stringent than the referenced quality standard. Comply with the Contract Documents in addition to those of the referenced quality standard. B. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde. C. Composite Wood Products: Products shall be made without urea formaldehyde. 2.2 FIVE-PLY FLUSH WOOD VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH A. Interior Doors: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Eggers Industries. b. Lambton Doors. c. Oshkosh Door Company. d. VT Industries Inc. 2. Performance Grade: WDMA I.S. 1A Heavy Duty. 3. Architectural Woodwork Standards Grade: Premium. 4. Faces: Single-ply wood veneer not less than 1/16 inch thick. a. Species: Select white maple or red oak, as indicated on Drawings. b. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced). c. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match. d. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match. e. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening. 5. Exposed Vertical Edges: Same species as faces - Architectural Woodwork Standards edge Type A. 6. Core for Non-Fire-Rated Doors: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD -1 particleboard. a. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware. 7. Construction: Five plies, hot-pressed bonded (vertical and horizontal edging is bonded to core), with entire unit abrasive planed before veneering. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 4 2.3 FABRICATION A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standar d for fitting unless otherwise indicated. B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. 1. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. 2. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, and hardware templates. 3. Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames, to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining. 4. For doors scheduled to receive electrified locksets, provide factory-installed raceway and wiring to accommodate specified hardware. 2.4 FACTORY FINISHING A. Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. 1. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 2. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mort ises. 3. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. B. Factory finish doors. C. Transparent Finish: 1. Finish: WDMA I.S. 1A TR-8 UV Cured Acrylated Polyester/Urethane. 2. Staining: None required. 3. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood pores. 4. Sheen: Satin. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors. 1. Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requireme nts for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 5 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 "Door Hardware." B. Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated. C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 14 16 - 6 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 1 SECTION 08 71 00 - DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Mechanical door hardware for the following: a. Swinging doors. 2. Electrified door hardware. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 06 41 13 "Wood-Veneer-Faced Architectural Cabinets" and Section 06 41 16 "Plastic-Laminate-Clad Architectural Cabinets" for cabinet door hardware provided with cabinets. 2. Section 08 12 16 "Aluminum Frames" for door silencers provided as part of aluminum frames. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Installation Templates: Distribute for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Security: Coordinate installation of door hardware, keying, and access control with Owner's security consultant. C. Electrical System Roughing-In: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies and building safety and security systems. D. Existing Openings: Where hardware components are scheduled for application to existin g construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to provide proper door operation. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 2 1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Conference participants shall include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant and Owner's security consultant. 2. Incorporate conference decisions into keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following: a. Flow of traffic and degree of security required. b. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. c. Requirements for access control. d. Address for delivery of keys. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For electrified door hardware. 1. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 2. Include details of interface of electrified door hardware and building safety and security systems. C. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Coordinate door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Submittal Sequence: Submit door hardware schedule concurrent with s ubmissions of Product Data, Samples, and Shop Drawings. Coordinate submission of door hardware schedule with scheduling requirements of other work to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in Project construction schedule. 2. Format: Use sa me scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as in door hardware schedule in the Contract Documents. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, size, and material of each door and frame. b. Locations of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings on floor plans and to door and frame schedule. c. Complete designations, including name and manufacturer, type, style, function, size, quantity, function, and finish of each door hardware product. d. Description of electrified door hardware sequences of operation and interfaces with other building control systems. e. Fastenings and other installation information. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 3 f. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and designations contained in door hardware schedule. g. Mounting locations for door hardware. h. List of related door devices specified in other Sections for each door and frame. D. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations that are coordinated with the Contract Documents. 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer and Architectural Hardware Consultant. B. Product Test Reports: For compliance with accessibility requirements, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for door hardware on doors located in accessible routes. C. Sample Warranty: For special warranty. 1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. B. Schedules: Final door hardware and keying schedule. 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Supplier of products and an employer of workers trained and approved by product manufacturers and of an Architectural Hardware Consultant who is available during the course of the Work to consult Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying. 1. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedule. 2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicate d for this Project. B. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is currently certified by DHI as an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) and an Electrified Hardware Consultant (EHC). CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 4 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification coordinated with the final door hardware schedule, and include installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or package. C. Deliver keys and permanent cores to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. b. Faulty operation of doors and door hardware. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering and use. 2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion unless otherwise indicated below: a. Mortise Locks: Ten years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Manual Closers: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of door hardware from single manufacturer. 1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that perform electrical modifications and that are listed by a testi ng and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction are acceptable. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and applica tion. B. Means of Egress Doors: Latches do not require more than 15 lbf to release the latch. Locks do not require use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 5 C. Accessibility Requirements: For door hardware on doors in an accessible route, comply with the DOJ's "2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design" and ICC A117.1. 1. Provide operating devices that do not require tight grasping, pinching, or twisting of the wrist and that operate with a force of not more than 5 lbf. 2. Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements: a. Interior, Non-Fire-Rated Hinged Doors: 5 lbf applied perpendicular to door. 3. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2. Provide thresholds not more than ½ inch high. 4. Adjust door closer sweep periods so that, from an open position of 90 degrees, the door will take at least 5 seconds to move to a position of 12 degrees from the latch. 2.3 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. Provide products for each door that comply with requirements indicated in Part 2 and door hardware schedule. 1. Door hardware is scheduled in Part 3. 2.4 HINGES A. Hinges: BHMA A156.1. Provide template-produced hinges for hinges installed on hollow- metal doors and hollow-metal frames. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Bommer Industries. b. Hager Companies. c. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. B. Quantity: Provide the following minimum quantity of hinges per leaf, unless greater quantity is indicated or scheduled: 1. Doors 61 to 90 Inches High: 3 hinges. 2. Doors Greater Than 90 Inches High: One additional hinge for every 30 inches over 90 inches. C. Hinge Size: Provide the following minimum hinge size, unless greater size is indicated or scheduled: 1. Door Width Up To 36 Inches: 4½ inches. 2. Door Width Over 36 Inches: 5 inches. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 6 D. Non-Removable Pins (NRP): For all out-swinging lockable doors, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed. 2.5 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHES A. Mortise Locks: BHMA A156.13; Operational Grade 1; stamped steel case with steel or brass parts; Series 1000; field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Lock Functions: As indicated in door hardware schedule. C. Lock Throw: Minimum ¾-inch throw anti-friction stainless steel latchbolt and 1-inch throw stainless steel bolt for deadbolt functions. D. Lock Backset: 2¾ inches unless otherwise indicated. E. Lock Trim: 1. Description: As indicated by manufacturer's design designation in Schedule. 2. Levers: Cast. 3. Escutcheons (Roses): Wrought. F. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each lock bolt or latchbolt complying with requirements indicated for applicable loc k or latch and with strike box and curved lip extended to protect frame; finished to match lock or latch. 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 2.6 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS A. Electromechanical Locks: BHMA A156.25; Grade 1; motor or solenoid driven; with strike that suits frame. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule. 2. Type: Mortise deadlocking latchbolt. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 7 2.7 INTEGRATED WIEGAND OUTPUT LOCKING DEVICES A. Integrated Wiegand Output Multi-Class Mortise Locks: Wiegand output ANSI A156.13, Grade 1, mortise lockset with integrated card reader, request-to-exit signaling, door position status switch, and latchbolt monitoring in one complete unit. Hard wired, solenoid-driven locking and unlocking control of the lever handle trim, ¾-inch deadlocking, anti-friction latch, and 1-inch case-hardened steel deadbolt. Lock U.L listed and labeled for use on up to 3-hour fire rated openings. With keyed high security cylinder override. 1. Open architecture, hard-wired platform supporting centralized control of locking units with new or existing Wiegand-compatible access control systems. Latchbolt monitoring and door position switch act in conjunction to report door -in-frame (DPS) and door latched (door closed and latched) conditions. 2. Integrated reader supporting the following credentials: a. 125kHz Proximity Credentials: HID, AWID, Indala, and EM4102. b. 13.56 MHz Proximity Credentials: HID iClass, HID iClass SE, SE for MIFARE Classic, and DESFire EV1. 3. Power Supply: 12VDC external power supply for reader and lock, with optional 24VDC lock solenoid. Field configurable for fail safe or fail secure options. 4. Energy Efficient Design: Provide lock bodies, which have a holding current draw of 15mA maximum, and can operate on either 12 or 24 volts. 5. Installation requires only one cable run from the lock to the access control panel without requirements for additional proprietary lock panel interface boards or modules. 6. Include manufacturer's access control panel interface board or module where required for Wiegand output protocol. 7. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule. 2.8 MANUAL FLUSH BOLTS A. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1; minimum ¾-inch throw; top rod of sufficient length to allow bolt location approximately 72 inches above the floor; with dust-proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Door Controls International, Inc. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Trimco. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 8 2.9 AUTOMATIC AND SELF-LATCHING FLUSH BOLTS A. Automatic Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 25; minimum ¾-inch throw; with dust-proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Door Controls International, Inc. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Trimco. B. Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3, Type 27; minimum ¾-inch throw; with dust-proof strikes; designed for mortising into door edge. Include wear plates. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Door Controls International, Inc. c. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. d. Trimco. 2.10 LOCK CYLINDERS A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of 10 years' experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. C. Lock Cylinders: BHMA A156.5; Grade 1 permanent cores; tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver. 1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam; face to be flush and be free spinning, finished to match lockset. 2. Core Type: Interchangeable. 3. Keyway: Match facility restricted keyway. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 9 2.11 KEYING A. Keying System: Factory registered, complying with guidelines in BHMA A156.28, appendix. Provide one extra key blank for each lock. Incorporate decisions made in keying conference. 1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system. B. Keys: Factory-cut, nickel-silver large bow. 1. Stamping: Permanently inscribe each key with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. C. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Top Master Key: One. 2. Change Keys per Cylinder: 2. 3. Master Keys (per Master Key Group): 2. 4. Grand Master Keys (per Grand Master Key Group): 2. 5. Construction Keys (where required): 10. D. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders or temporary keyed construction cores at exterior doors, doors in construction barriers, office suite doors to corridors, and other locations as directed by Owner. Provide construction master keys in quantity as required by project Contractor. Replace construction cores with permanent cores. Furnish permanent cores for installation as directed by Owner. E. Key Registration List: Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2.12 KEY CONTROL SYSTEM A. Key Control Cabinet: BHMA A156.28; metal cabinet with baked-enamel finish; containing key-holding hooks, labels, two sets of key tags with self-locking key holders, key-gathering envelopes, receipt forms, 3-way visible card index, and temporary and permanent markers; with key capacity of 150 percent of the number of locks. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Lund Equipment Co., Inc. b. MMF Industries. c. TelKee; Oasis International. 2.13 OPERATING TRIM A. Operating Trim: BHMA A156.6; stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 10 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Trimco. 2.14 SURFACE CLOSERS A. Source Limitation: Provide all door closers from single manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type of door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. B. Standards: Provide closers that comply with UL-10C and UBC 7-2 for Positive Pressure Fire Test and are UL listed for use on fire rated doors. C. Cycle Testing: Provide closers which have surpassed 15 million cycles in test s witnessed and verified by UL. D. Size of Units: Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force. Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the physically handicapped, provide units complying with ICC A117.1. E. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates, and through-bolt or security type fasteners as required. F. Surface Closers: BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; heavy-duty, rack-and-pinion hydraulic type, non- handed, with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; fully operational adjustable according to door size, fr equency of use, and opening force; with forged-steel main arm and one-piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control . Provide full sized covers including installation and adjusting information on inside of cover. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Allegion plc; LCN. b. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.15 MECHANICAL STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Wall- and Floor-Mounted Stops: BHMA A156.16, Grade 1. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 11 a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Trimco. 2.16 OVERHEAD STOPS AND HOLDERS A. Overhead Stops and Holders: BHMA A156.8, Grade 1; extruded bronze track, slide, arm, and jamb bracket with heavy tempered steel shock absorber spring; non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Allegion, plc; Glynn Johnson. b. Rixson Specialty Door Controls; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. SARGENT Manufacturing Company; ASSA ABLOY. 2.17 DOOR GASKETING A. Door Gasketing: BHMA A156.22; with resilient or flexible seal strips that are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 2.18 THRESHOLDS A. Thresholds: BHMA A156.21; fabricated to full width of opening indicated. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. National Guard Products, Inc. b. Pemko Manufacturing Co. c. Reese Enterprises, Inc. d. Zero International, Inc. 2.19 METAL PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS A. Metal Protective Trim Units: BHMA A156.6; beveled four edges; fabricated from 0.050-inch- thick stainless steel; with manufacturer's standard machine or self-tapping screw fasteners. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 12 1. Size: Provide kick, mop, and armor plates of the following sizes: a. Pull Side: Maximum 1 inch less than door width. b. Push Side, Single Door: Maximum 2 inches less than door width. c. Push side, Pair of Doors: Maximum 1 inch less than door width. d. Height: 6 inches, or as indicated in door hardware schedule. 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in door hardware schedule or comparable product by one of the following: a. Burns Manufacturing Incorporated. b. Rockwood Manufacturing Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. c. Trimco. 2.20 POWER TRANSFER DEVICES A. Concealed Quick Connect Electric Power Transfers: Provide concealed wiring pathway housing mortised into the door and frame for low voltage electrified door hardware. Furnish with Molex™ standardized plug connectors and sufficient number of concealed wir es (up to 12) to accommodate the electrified functions specified in the Door Hardware Schedule. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. B. Electric Power Harness: Electric transfer wiring harnesses with standardized plug connectors to accommodate up to 12 wires. Connectors plug directly to through-door wiring harnesses for connection to electric locking devices and power supplies. Provide su fficient number of concealed wires to accommodate electric function of specified hardware. Provide a connector for through-door electronic locking devices and from hinge to junction box above the opening. Wire nut connections are not acceptable. Determine the length required for each electrified hardware component for the door type, size, and construction, minimum 2 per electrified opening. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. McKinney Products Company; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. 2.21 ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES A. Door Position Switches: Door position magnetic reed contact switches specifically designed for use in commercial door applications; contact and magnetic housing snap-lock into 1-inch diameter hole. Provide SPDT, N/O switches with rare earth magnet on steel doors with flush top channels. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 13 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: a. Securitron Magnalock Corporation; an ASSA ABLOY Group company. b. Sonitrol, Inc. 2.22 FABRICATION A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rating labels and as otherwise approved by Architect. 1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only. B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal indicated, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18. C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws that comply with commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fa steners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow-metal doors. 2.23 FINISHES A. Provide finishes complying with BHMA A156.18 as indicated in door hardware schedule. B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a s trippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire-rated door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Confirm presence and position of wall blocking for wall-mounted stops and other hardware. B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been correcte d. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Steel Doors and Frames: For surface-applied door hardware, drill and tap doors and frames according to ANSI/SDI A250.6. B. Wood Doors: Comply with door and hardware manufacturers' written instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights to comply with the following unless otherwise indicated or required to comply with governing regulations. 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: HMMA 831. 3. Wood Doors: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors." B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are late r to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 15 C. Hinges: Install types and in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than the number recommended by manufacturer for application indicated or one hinge for every 30 inches of door height, whichever is more stringent, unless other equivalent means of support for door, such as spring hinges or pivots, are provided. D. Intermediate Offset Pivots: Where offset pivots are indicated, provide intermediate offset pivots in quantities indicated in door hardware schedule, but not fewer than one intermediate offset pivot per door and one additional intermediate offset pivot for every 30 inches of door height greater than 90 inches. E. Lock Cylinders: Install construction cores to secure building and ar eas during construction period. 1. Replace construction cores with permanent cores as directed by Owner. 2. Furnish permanent cores to Owner for installation. F. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings. Verify location with Architect. 1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening with electrified door hardware. G. Stops: Provide wall stops for doors unless floor or other type stops are indicated in door hardware schedule. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. H. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 1. Do not notch perimeter gasketing to install other surface-applied hardware. I. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. J. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports. 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 1. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period to comply with accessibility requirements and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 16 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish. C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 DOOR HARDWARE 08 71 00 - 17 3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE QTY ITEM MFR MODEL SIZE FIN Hardware Set #1 Office 1½ Pair Butts McKinney TA2314 4½ x 4½ 626 1 Mortise Lockset SARGENT 8255 x LNL 626 1 Cylinder SARGENT 626 1 Wall Stop Rockwood 406 626 1 Set Sound Stripping Zero International 870AA 628 END OF SECTION 08 71 00 CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 1 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Glass for interior doors and borrowed lites. 2. Glazing sealants and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness desi gnations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. 1.4 COORDINATION A. Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For sealants, indicate VOC content. B. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square. C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system. D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 2 1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Certificates: For glass. B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cardinal Glass Industries. 2. Guardian Glass; SunGuard. 3. Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope. 4. Pilkington North America. 5. Viracon, Inc. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 3 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category II. 2.3 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual." B. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark g lazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. C. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. 2.4 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3. B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3. 1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2.5 LAMINATED GLASS A. La minated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer or ionomer ic polymer interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS A. General: CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 4 1. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. Sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Sika Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated. 2.7 GLAZING TAPES A. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types: 1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant. 2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, with requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a pr oven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation. B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer. C. Setting Blocks: 1. Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5. 2. Type r ecommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. D. Spacers: CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 5 1. Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. E. Edge Blocks: 1. Elastomeric material with a Shore A durometer hardness per manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Type recommended by sealant or glass manufacturer. F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance. 2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge a nd surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces. C. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following: 1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 3. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 6 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately befor e glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visib le marks in the completed Work. 3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance. C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide ⅛-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. H. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. I. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. J. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 7 K. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. 3.4 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY) A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation. B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners. C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure - glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 8 E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. 3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. 1. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned wit hout damage to coatings. C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period. D. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as rec ommended in writing by glass manufacturer. 3.8 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type G: Clear annealed float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. B. Glass Type TG: Clear fully tempered float glass. 1. Minimum Thickness: 6 mm. 2. Safety glazing required. 3.9 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Glass Type LG: Clear laminated glass with two plies of annealed float glass. CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 9 1. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm. 2. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch. 3. Safety glazing required. B. Glass Type AELG: Acid-etched laminated glass with decorative pattern evenly etched into one surface. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Walker Glass Company, Ltd.; Textures Velour. 2. Glass Type: Clear, annealed float glass. 3. Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Ply: 3 mm. 4. Interlayer Thickness: 0.030 inch (1.52 mm). 5. Safety glazing required. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 CCC – ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GLAZING 08 80 00 - 10 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 1 SECTION 09 01 90.52 - MAINTENANCE REPAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes maintenance repainting as follows: 1. Cleaning, repair, patching, and preparation of substrates. 2. Repainting. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting," for paint materials and systems for new construction. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than 5 units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. 2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Perform maintenance repainting in the following sequence, which includes work specified in this and other Sections: 1. Dismantle existing surface-mounted objects and hardware except items indicated to remain in place. Tag items with location identification and protect. 2. Verify that temporary protections have been installed. 3. Examine condition of surfaces to be painted. 4. Perform repairs required to achieve smooth, sound surface ready to receive paint. 5. Remove existing paint to the degree required for each substrate and surface condition of existing paint. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 2 6. Apply paint system. 7. Reinstall dismantled surface-mounted objects and hardware unless otherwise indicated. 1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include recommendations for product application and use. 2. Include test data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Samples: For each type of paint system and each pattern, color, and gloss; in sizes indicated below. 1. Include a list of materials for each coat of each Sample. 2. Label each Sample for location and application. 3. Sample Size: a. Painted Surfaces: 4-by-8-inch Samples for each color and material, on hardboard. C. Product List: For each paint product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each MPI-product category specified in paint systems, with the proposed product highlighted. 3. VOC content. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Color Matching: Custom computer-match paint colors to match Architect's samples. B. Mockups: Prepare mockups of maintenance repainting processes for each type of coating system and substrate indicated and each color and finish required to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution. Duplicate appearance of approved Sample submittals. 1. Locate mockups on existing surfaces where directed by Architect. 2. Surface-Preparation Mockups: On existing surfaces using applicable specified methods of cleaning and other surface preparation, provide mockup sample of at least 100 sq. ft. 3. Coating Mockups: One surface of at least 100 sq. ft. to represent surfa ces and conditions for application of each type of coating system under same conditions as the completed Work. 4. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 5. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 3 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covere d containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste daily. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PREPARATORY CLEANING MATERIALS A. Water: Potable. B. Detergent Solution: Solution prepared by mixing 2 cups of tetrasodium pyrophosphate (TSPP), ½ cup of laundry detergent that contains no ammonia, 5 quarts of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 15 quarts of warm water for every 5 gal. of solution required. C. Mildewcide: Commercial proprietary mildewcide or a job -mixed solution prepared by mixing ⅓ cup of household detergent that contains no ammonia, 1 quart of 5 percent sodium hypochlorite bleach, and 3 quarts of warm water. D. Abrasives for Ferrous Metal Cleaning: Aluminum oxide paper, emery paper, fine steel wool, steel scrapers, and steel-wire brushes of various sizes. E. Rust Remover: Manufacturer's standard phosphoric acid-based gel formulation, also called "naval jelly," for removing corrosion from iron and steel. 2.2 PAINT REMOVERS A. Low-Odor, Solvent-Type Paste Paint Remover: Manufacturer's standard low-odor, water- rinsable, solvent-type paste, gel, or foamed emulsion formulation for removing paint from masonry, stone, wood, plaster, or metal as required to suit Project; and containing no methanol or methylene chloride. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. ABR Products, Inc.; ABR Citrus Paint Removers or Super Bio Strip Gel. b. Cathedral Stone Products, Inc.; S-301, S-303, or S-305. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 4 c. Dumond Chemicals, Inc.; Peel Away 7 without paper covering, Smart Strip, or Smart Strip Pro. d. EaCo Chem, Inc.; InStrip. e. PROSOCO, Inc.; Enviro Klean SafStrip or Enviro Klean SafStrip 8. 2.3 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Provide products that comply with MPI standards indicated and that are listed in its "MPI Approved Products List." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For interior paints and coatings applied at Project site, the following VOC limits, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Me tals: 100 g/L. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. E. Transition Coat: Paint manufacturer's recommended coating for use where a residual existing coating is incompatible with the paint system. 2.4 PAINT MATERIAL MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated in Interior Maintenance Repainting Schedule at the end of Part 3, or compar able product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Coatings. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 5 2.5 PATCHING MATERIALS A. Metal-Patching Compound: Two-part, polyester-resin, metal-patching compound; knife-grade formulation as recommended in writing by manufacturer for type of metal repair indicated, tooling time required for the detail of work, and site conditions. Compound shall be produced for filling metal that has deteriorated from corrosion. Filler shall be capable of filling deep holes and spreading to feather edge. B. Gypsum-Plaster Patching Compound: Finish coat plaster and bonding compound according to AS TM C 842 and manufacturer's written instructions. C. Gypsum Board Patching Compound: Setting-type joint taping compound according to ASTM C 475; paper tape where required. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PROTECTION A. Comply with each manufacturer's written instructions for protectin g building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. 3.2 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING, GENERAL A. Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard: Completed work is to have a uniform appearance as viewed by Architect from building interior at 5 feet away from painted surface. B. Execution of the Work: In repainting surfaces, disturb them as minimally as possible and as follows: 1. Remove failed coatings and corrosion and repaint. 2. Verify that substrate surface conditions are suitable for repainting. 3. Allow other trades to repair items in place before repainting. 4. Repaint with sufficient coats to produce uniform appearance. C. Perform each cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage of all surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect without streaking or damaging surfaces. D. Perform additional general cleaning, paint and stain removal, and spot cleaning of small areas that are noticeably different when viewed according to the "Maintenance Repainting Appearance Standard" Paragraph, so that cleaned surfaces blend smoothly into surrounding areas. E. Mechanical Abrasion: Where mechanical abrasion is needed for the work, use gentle methods, such as scraping and lightly hand sanding, that will not abrade softer substrates, reducing clarity of detail. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 6 F. Heat Processes: Do not use torches, heat guns, or heat plates. 3.3 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of painting work. Comply with paint manufacturer's written instructions for inspection. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: Do not begin application of coatings unless moisture content of exposed surface is below the maximum value recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and not greater than the following maximum values when measured with an electronic moisture meter appropriate to the substrate material: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 2. Gypsum Plaster: 12 percent. C. Alkalinity: Do not begin application of coatings unless surface alkalinity is within range recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Conduct alkali testing with litmus paper on exposed plaster, cementitious, and masonry surfaces. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers. 1. If existing surfaces cannot be prepared to an acceptable condition for proper finishing by using specified surface-preparation methods, notify Architect in writing. E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions. 3.4 PREPARATORY CLEANING A. General: Use the gentlest, appropriate method necessary to clean surfaces in preparation for painting. Clean all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices. B. Detergent Hand Cleaning: Wash surfaces by hand using clean rags, sponges, and bristle brushes. Scrub surface with detergent solution and bristle brush until soil is thoroughly dislodged and can be removed by rinsing. Use small brushes to remove soil from joints and crevices. Dip brush in solution often to ensure that adequate fresh detergent is used and that surface remains wet. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 7 C. Solvent Cleaning: Use solvent cleaning to remove oil, grease, smoke, and other contaminants from painted or unpainted surfaces before other preparation work. Wipe surfaces with solvent using clean rags and sponges. If necessary, spot-solvent cleaning may be employed just prior to commencement of paint application, provided enough time is allowed for complete evaporation. Use clean solvent and clean rags for the final wash to ensure that all foreign materials have been removed. Do not use solvents, including primer thinner and turpentine, that leave residue. D. Mildew: Clean off existing mildew by scrubbing with bristle brush or sponge and detergent solution. Scrub mildewed areas with mildewcide. Rinse with water applied by clean rags or sponges. E. Chemical Rust Removal: 1. Remove loose rust scale with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. 2. Apply rust remover with brushes or as recommended in writing by manufacturer. 3. Allow rust remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. Do not allow extended dwell time. 4. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags, or clean with method recommended in writing by manufacturer to remove residue. 5. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 6. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. F. Mechanical Rust Removal: 1. Remove rust with specified abrasives for ferrous-metal cleaning. Clean to bright metal. 2. Wipe off residue with mineral spirits and either steel wool or soft rags. 3. Dry immediately with clean, soft cloths. Follow direction of grain in metal. 4. Prime immediately to prevent rust. Do not touch cleaned metal surface until primed. 3.5 PAINT REMOVAL A. General: Remove paint where indicated. Where cleaning methods have been attempted and further removal of the paint is required because of incompatible or unsatisfactory surfaces for repainting, remove paint to extent required by conditions. 1. Application: Apply paint removers according to paint-remover manufacturer's written instructions. Do not allow paint removers to remain on surface for periods longer than those indicated or recommended in writing by manufacturer. a. Apply materials to all surfaces, corners, contours, and interstices, to provide a uniform final appearance without streaks. b. After work is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive marks. 2. Brushes: Use br ushes that are resistant to chemicals being used. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 8 a. Metal Substrates: If using wire brushes on metal, use brushes of same metal composition as metal being treated. B. Paint Removal with Hand Tools: Remove paint manually using hand-held scrapers, wire brushes, sandpaper, and metallic wool as appropriate for the substrate material. C. Paint Removal with Alkaline Paste Paint Remover: 1. Remove loose and peeling paint using water, scrapers, stiff brushes, or a combination of these. Let surface dry thoroughly. 2. Apply paint remover to dry, painted surface with brushes. 3. Allow paint remover to remain on surface for period recommended in writing by manufacturer or as determined by preconstruction testing. 4. Remove chemicals and paint residue by the following methods, as recommende d in writing by paint remover manufacturer: a. Rinse with cold or hot water applied by low or medium-pressure spray. b. Use mechanical removal methods. 5. Repeat process if necessary to remove all paint. 3.6 SUBSTRATE REPAIR A. General: Repair substrate surface defects that are inconsistent with the surface appearance of adjacent materials and finishes. B. Gypsum-Plaster and Gypsum-Board Substrates: 1. Repair defects including dents and chips more than ⅛ inch in size and all holes and cracks by filling with gypsum-plaster patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove protruding fasteners. 2. Rout out surface cracks to remove loose, unsound material; fill with patching compound and sand smooth. C. Metal Substrate: 1. Preparation: Treat repair locations by wire-brushing and solvent cleaning. Use chemical or mechanical rust removal method to clean off rust. 2. Defects in Metal Surfaces: Repair non-load-bearing defects in existing metal surfaces, including dents and gouges more than 1/16 inch deep or ½ inch across and all holes and cracks by filling with metal-patching compound and sanding smooth. Remove burrs and protruding fasteners. 3. Priming: Prime iron and steel surfaces immediately after repair to prevent flas h rusting. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges. Apply two coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 9 3.7 PAINT APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturers' written instructions for application methods unl ess otherwise indicated in this Section. B. Prepare surfaces to be painted according to the Surface-Preparation Schedule and with manufacturer's written instructions for each substrate condition. C. Apply a transition coat over incompatible existing coatings. D. Metal Substrate: Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges before applying full coat. Apply two coats to surfaces that are inaccessible after completion of the Work. Tint stripe coat different than the main coating and apply with brush. E. Blending Painted Surfaces: When painting new substrates patched into existing surfaces or touching up missing or damaged finishes, apply coating system specified for the specific substrate. Apply final finish coat over entire surface from edge to edge and c orner to corner. 3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.9 SURFACE-PREPARATION SCHEDULE A. General: Before painting, prepare surfaces for painting according to appli cable requirements specified in this schedule. 1. Examine surfaces to evaluate each surface condition according to paragraphs below. 2. Where existing degree of soiling prevents examination, preclean surface and allow it to dry before making an evaluation. 3. Repair substrate defects according to "Substrate Repair" Article. B. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 0 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Existing paint film in good condition and tightly adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Not required. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 10 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Roughen or degloss cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. C. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 1 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film cracked or broken but adhered. 2. Paint Removal: Scrape by hand-tool cleaning methods to remove loose paint until only tightly adhered paint remains. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent clea ning; use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Roughen, degloss, and sand the cleaned surfaces to ensure paint adhesion and a smooth finish according to paint manufacturer's written instructions. D. Surface Preparation for MPI DSD 2 Degree of Surface Degradation: 1. Surface Condition: Paint film loose, flaking, or peeling. 2. Paint Removal: Remove loose, flaking, or peeling paint film by hand-tool or chemical paint-removal methods. 3. Preparation for Painting: Wash surface by detergent cleaning; use solvent cleaning where needed. Use other cleaning methods for small areas of bare substrate if required. Sand surfaces to smooth remaining paint film edges. Prepare bare cleaned surface to be painted according to paint manufacturer's written instructions for substrate construction materials. 3.10 INTERIOR MAINTENANCE REPAINTING SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal Substrates: 1. Latex System: MPI RIN 5.1N system over a transition coat. a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer r equired. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Metal, Surface Tolerant, MPI #23. 1) Benjamin Moore; Coronado Rust Scat Metal Primer. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. 1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss. B. Wood Windows Frames and Moldings: 1. Latex System over Latex Primer: MPI RIN 6.3U system over a tra nsition coat. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 11 a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Latex Primer, MPI #39. 1) Benjamin Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. c. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, matching topcoat. d. Topcoat: Latex, interior, semigloss (Gloss Level 5), MPI #54. 1) Benjamin Moore; Natura Waterborne Interior Semi-Gloss. C. Gypsum Board and Plaster: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System over Waterborne Primer: MPI RIN 9.2M: a. Prime Coat Conditions: 1) For MPI DSD 0 degree of surface degradation, no primer required. 2) For MPI DSD 1 degree of surface degradation, touch up with topcoat. 3) For MPI DSD 2 degree of surface degradation, spot prime with primer. b. Prime Coat: Primer, Stain Blocking, Water Based, MPI #137. 1) Benjamin Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC flat (Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish. d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. END OF SECTION 09 01 90.52 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 MAINTENANCE REPAINTING 09 01 90.52 - 12 INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 1 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Grid suspension systems for gypsum board ceilings. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Memb ers, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Tracks: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and tracks or embossed steel studs and tracks. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 2 1. Steel Studs and Tracks: a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) MBA Building Supplies. 3) MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 4) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 5) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 6) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch. c. Depth: 3 ⅝ inches. 2. Embossed Steel Studs and Tracks: Roll-formed and embossed with surface deformations to stiffen the framing members so that they are structurally equivalent to conventional ASTM C 645 steel studs and tracks. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co. 2) ClarkDietrich Building Systems. 3) MarinoWARE. 4) MBA Building Supplies. 5) Phillips Manufacturing Co. 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The). 7) Telling Industries. b. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0190 inch. c. Depth: 3 ⅝ inches. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following: 1. Double-Track System: ASTM C 645 top outer tracks, inside track with 2-inch-deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer track sized to friction-fit over inner track. 2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top track manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: provide one of the following: 1) Blazeframe Industries; Bare Slotted Track (BST/BST 2). 2) CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; CST Slotted Deflection Track. 3) ClarkDietrich Building Systems; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 4) MBA Building Supplies; Slotted Deflecto Track. 5) Metal-Lite; The System. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 3 6) Steel Network, Inc. (The); VertiTrack VTD. 7) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Firestop Tracks: Top track manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Blazeframe Industries; Intumescent Framing, Fire Stop System. b. CEMCO; California Expanded Metal Products Co.; FAS Track. c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems; BlazeFrame. d. Fire Trak Corp; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. e. Metal-Lite; The System. E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch. F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch. 2. Depth: ⅞ inch. G. Resilient Furring Channels: ½-inch-deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. ClarkDietrich Building Systems. b. MRI Steel Framing, LLC. 2. Configuration: Asymmetrical. 2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Hanger Attachments to Concrete: 1. Post-Installed Anchors: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC58 AC308 as appropriate for the substrate. a. Uses: Securing hangers to structure. b. Type: Adhesive anchor. c. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 4 B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640/660 Drywall Ceiling Suspension. c. United States Gypsum Company; Drywall Suspension System. 2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Steel Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, ⅛ inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsati sfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 5 E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. 3.3 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 24 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. D. Install tracks at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum ½-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openin gs the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire -resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 22 16 - 6 3.4 INSTALLING CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Hangers: 48 inches o.c. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit. D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross -furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 1 SECTION 09 29 00 - GYPSUM BOARD PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for joint sealants in gypsum board construction. 2. Section 09 22 16 "Non-Structural Metal Framing" for non-structural steel framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are no t limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 2 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated. 2.3 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. American Gypsum. b. CertainTeed Corporation. c. Georgia-Pacific Building Products. d. National Gypsum Company. e. PABCO Gypsum. f. USG Corporation. 2. Thickness: ⅝ inch. 3. Long Edges: Tapered and featured (rounde d or beveled) for prefilling. 2.4 SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD A. Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of two layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 3 a. Quiet Solution; PABCO Gypsum. 2. Core: ⅝ inch, Type X. 3. Long Edges: Tapered. 2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. c. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. Expansion (control) joint. 2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M. B. Joint Tape: Paper. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatib le with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joi nts, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 2.7 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. C. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 4 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. D. Acoustical Sealant: Refer to Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and support framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL A. Comply with ASTM C 840. B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member. C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place. D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applicati ons where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings. E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels. F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally. 1. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 2. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant. G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide ¼- to ½-inch-wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 5 H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first. I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written instructions for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side. 3.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical and horizontal surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings. B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws. C. Multilayer Application: 1. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 GYPSUM BOARD 09 29 00 - 6 C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 3. L-Bead: Use where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape. D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for acoustical panels. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 09 91 23 "Interior Painting." 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application. B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period. C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. END OF SECTION 09 29 00 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 1 SECTION 09 51 13 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for interior ceilings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants" for sealants in acoustical panel ceiling construction. C. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling attachment devices to be cast in concrete. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied finishes. C. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of sizes indicated below: 1. Acoustical Panels: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples of each type, finish, and color. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following ite ms are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension-system members. 2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached. 3. Carrying channels or other supplemental support for hanger -wire attachment where conditions do not permit installation of hanger wires at required spacing. 4. Items penetrating finished ceiling and ceiling-mounted items including the following: CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 2 a. Lighting fixtures. b. Diffusers. c. Grilles. d. Speakers. e. Sprinklers. f. Perimeter moldings. 5. Minimum Drawing Scale: ¼ inch = 1 foot. B. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency. C. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type, from ICC-ES. 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals. 1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes. B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content. 1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until wet-work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and its supportin g suspension system from single source from single manufacturer. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agenc y. 1. Flame-Spread Index: Class A according to ASTM E 1264. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACP-1 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Optima Fine Texture Square Tegular, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Chica go Metallic Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's sta ndard panels according to ASTM E 1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with me mbrane-faced overlay; Form 2, cloth. Binder shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.90. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.90. G. Articulation Class (AC): Not less than 180. H. Edge/Joint Detail: Square reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. I. Thickness: 1 inch. J. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 4 2.4 ACOUSTICAL PANELS ACP-2 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Optima Fine Texture Square Tegular, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels according to ASTM E 1264 and designated by type, form, pattern, acoustical rating, and light reflectance unless otherwise indicated. C. Classification: Provide panels as follows: 1. Type and Form: Type XII, glass-fiber base with membrane-faced overlay; Form 2, cloth. Binder shall not contain urea formaldehyde. 2. Pattern: E (lightly textured). D. Color: White. E. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.90. F. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.90. G. Edge/Joint Detail: Square reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members. H. Thickness: 1 inch. I. Modular Sizes: 24 by 24 inches; 24 by 12 inches; 24 by 6 inches; 48 by 24 inches; 48 by 12 inches; and 48 by 6 inches, as indicated on reflected ceiling plans. 2.5 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 9/16-inch Suprafine XL, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Chicago Metallic Corporation. 3. United States Gypsum Company. B. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard, direct-hung, metal suspension system and accessories according to ASTM C 635/C 635M and designated by type, structural classification, and finish indicated. C. Narrow-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized, G30 coating designation; with prefinished 9/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 5 1. Structural Classification: Heavy-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Cold-rolled steel. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white. D. Off-Module Cross Tee Connectors and Trim: Where required to connect cross tees at off- module locations to accommodate light fixtures, diffusers, other penetrations, and off-module acoustical panels, provide manufacturer's adapter clips and accessories. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide the following products as required for conditions: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Single Tee Adapter Clip (STAC). b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Grip Clip 3-Way (GC3W). c. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Expansion Sleeve (IES3). 2.6 ACCESSORIES A. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements. 1. Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to five times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determine d by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. a. Type: Postinstalled bonded anchors. b. Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated according to ASTM B 633, Class SC 1 (mild) service condition. B. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires as follows: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Wire diameter sufficient for its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but not less than 0.106-inch- diameter wire. 2.7 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the metal suspension system manufacturer. B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings a nd Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 6 1. Edge moldings shall fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and match width and configuration of exposed runners unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at exposed suspension member. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly. 4. For transitions to gypsum board, and where indicated, provide manufacturer's F -shaped trim designed to transition acoustical panel ceilings to gypsum board. 2.8 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Section 07 92 19 "Acoustical Joint Sealants." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders unless otherwise indicated, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans. B. Layout openings for penetrations centered on the penetrating items. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install acoustical panel ceilings according t o ASTM C 636/C 636M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 7 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly to structure or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 5. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 6. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards. C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors. D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim. E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members. F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners and edge moldi ngs. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide precise fit. 1. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 2. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Suspended Ceilings: Install main and cross runners level to a tolerance of ⅛ inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 51 13 - 8 B. Moldings and Trim: Install moldings and trim to substrate and level with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of ⅛ inch in 12 feet, non-cumulative. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. B. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. END OF SECTION 09 51 13 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 1 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Thermoplastic-rubber base. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For adhesives, include documentation indicating compliance with requirements for low- emitting materials. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended b y manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. 1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by ma nufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 2 C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 THERMOPLASTIC-RUBBER BASE A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; a division of Burke Industries Inc. 3. Flexco. 4. Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company. 5. Nora Systems, Inc. 6. Roppe Corporation, USA. B. Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TP (rubber, thermoplastic). 1. Group: I (solid, homogeneous). 2. Style: Style A, Straight. C. Thickness: 0.125 inch. D. Height: 4 inches. E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length. F. Outside Corners: Preformed. G. Inside Corners: Job formed. H. Colors: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors. 2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland-cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and c onditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products. B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient ba se. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops o f adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 65 13 - 4 F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient -product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 1 SECTION 09 91 23 - INTERIOR PAINTING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Steel and iron. 2. Galvanized metal. 3. Copper. 4. Wood. 5. Plastic. 6. Gypsum board. B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 08 12 13 "Hollow Metal Frames" for shop priming of hollow metal frames. 2. Section 09 01 90.52 "Maintenance Repainting" for preparation and painting of existing interior and exterior surfaces. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. The following MPI gloss levels are defined in accordance with ASTM D 523. 1. Gloss Level 1: Not more than five units at 60 degrees and 10 units at 85 degrees. 2. Gloss Level 2: Not more than 10 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 3. Gloss Level 3: 10 to 25 units at 60 degrees and 10 to 35 units at 85 degrees. 4. Gloss Level 4: 20 to 35 units at 60 degrees and not less than 35 units at 85 degrees. 5. Gloss Level 5: 35 to 70 units at 60 degrees. 6. Gloss Level 6: 70 to 85 units at 60 degrees. 7. Gloss Level 7: More than 85 units at 60 degrees. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. Include preparation requirements and application instructions. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 2 1. Include Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified, with the proposed product highlighted. 2. Indicate VOC content. B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat. 1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. C. Product List: Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. Include color designations. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to repre sent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Co ntract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 4. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily. 1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 deg F. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 3 B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in the Interior Painting Schedule, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc. 3. Pratt & Lambert. 4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The). 2.2 PAINT, GENERAL A. MPI Standards: Products shall comply with MPI standards indicated and shall be listed in its "MPI Approved Products Lists." B. Material Compatibility: 1. Materials for use within each paint system shall be compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, products shall be recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturers for use in paint system and on substrate indicated. C. VOC Content: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, paints and coatings shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction and the following VOC content limits: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints and Coatings: 50 g/L. 3. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: 100 g/L. 4. Rust-Preventive Coatings: 100 g/L. 5. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: 100 g/L. 6. Pretreatment Wash Primers: 420 g/L. D. Colors: Match Architect's samples. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. C. Gypsum Board Substrates: Verify that finishing compound is sanded smooth. D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility, with existing finishes and primers. E. Proceed with coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Application of coating indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specificati on Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated. B. Remove hardware, covers, plates, and similar items already in place that are removable and are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, pr ovide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dust, dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers or apply tie coat as required to produce paint systems indicated. D. Steel Substrates: Remove rust, loose mill scale, and shop primer, if a ny. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. E. Shop-Primed Steel Substrates: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and areas where shop paint is abraded. Paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop priming to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-primed surfaces. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 5 F. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. 3.3 APPLICATION A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in "MPI Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces. 4. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. 5. Primers specified in painting schedules may be omitted on items that are factory primed or factory finished if acceptable to topcoat manufacturers. B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks. E. Painting Fire Suppression, Plumbing, HVAC, Electrical, Communication, and Electronic Safety and Security Work: 1. Paint the following work where exposed in occupied spaces: a. Equipment, including panelboards. b. Uninsulated metal piping. c. Uninsulated plastic piping. d. Pipe hangers and supports. e. Metal conduit. f. Plastic conduit. g. Other items as directed by Architect. 2. Paint portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets that are visible from occupied spaces. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 6 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site. B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition. D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. 3.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Steel Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.1R: a. Prime Coat: Primer, alkyd, anti-corrosive, for metal, MPI #79. 1) Benjamin Moore; Super Spec HP Alkyd Metal Primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish. B. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.3M: a. Prime Coat: Primer, galvanized, water based, MPI #134. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec HP Acrylic Metal Primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat, Visible Duct Interiors: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #138. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low Sheen Finish. d. Topcoat, All Other Galvanized Metal: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 7 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Gloss Finish. C. Copper Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 5.5F: a. Prime Coat: Primer, quick dry, for aluminum, MPI #95. 1) Rust-Oleum; X Seal. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, semi-gloss (MPI Gloss Level 5), MPI #141. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Gloss Finish. D. Wood Substrates: Wood trim. 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.3A: a. Prime Coat, If Not Shop-Primed: Primer, latex, for interior wood, MPI #39. 1) Benjamin Moore; Sure Seal Latex Primer Sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish. E. Plastic Substrates: 1. High-Performance Architectural Latex System MPI INT 6.8A: a. Prime Coat: Primer, bonding, solvent based, MPI #69. 1) Rust-Oleum; X Seal. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural, matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Latex, interior, high performance architectural (MPI Gloss Level 4), MPI #140. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Semi-Gloss Finish. F. Gypsum Board Substrates: 1. Institutional Low-Odor/VOC Latex System MPI INT 9.2M: CCC - ROOM 330 D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 INTERIOR PAINTING 09 91 23 - 8 a. Prime Coat: Primer sealer, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, MPI #149. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Waterborne Interior Primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, ma tching topcoat. c. Topcoat, Ceilings and Soffits: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC, flat (MPI Gloss Level 1), MPI #143. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Flat Finish. d. Topcoat, Walls: Latex, interior, institutional low odor/VOC (MPI Gloss Level 2), MPI #144. 1) Benjamin Moore; Ultra Spec 500 Interior Low-Sheen Finish. END OF SECTION 09 91 23 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 1 SECTION 21 13 13 - WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pipes, fittings, and specialties. 2. Specialty valves. 3. Sprinklers. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Standard-Pressure Sprinkler Piping: Wet-pipe sprinkler system piping designed to operate at working pressure of 175-psig maximum. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. Follow all City of Ithaca documentation requirements. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Sprinkler systems, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 2 1. Domestic water piping. 2. HVAC hydronic piping. 3. Items penetrating finished ceiling include the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. B. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer. C. Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, the City of Ithaca, and FM Global, that have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if applicable. D. Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping." E. Field quality-control reports. F. Submit copies of Shop Drawings and hydraulic calculations to the following and do not commence with construction until all parties have given their approval: 1. Ithaca Fire Department. 2. Cornell Environmental Health & Safety. 3. FM Global. 1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wet-pipe sprinkler systems and specialties to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Sprinkler Cabinets: Finished, wall-mounted, steel cabinet with hinged cover, and with space for minimum of six spare sprinklers plus sprinkler wrench. Include number of sprinklers required by NFPA 13 and sprinkler wrench. Include separate cabinet with sprinklers and wrench for each type of sprinkler used on Project. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 3 1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: 1. Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test. a. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field test reports by a qualified professional engineer. 1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing preaction sprinkler systems supply portions of the ground and second floors. B. Interruption of Existing Sprinkler Service: Do not interrupt sprinkler service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions a nd then only after arranging to provide temporary sprinkler service according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Construction Manager no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of sprinkler service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of sprinkler service without Construction Manager's written permission. C. Sprinkler systems cannot be taken out of service for more than one work shift. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 13. 2. NFPA 25. 3. FM Global. B. Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure. C. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements," to design wet-pipe sprinkler systems. 1. Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction. a. Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 psi or 10 percent, whichever is higher, including losses through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 4 b. Sprinkler Occupancy Hazard Classifications: 1) Office and Public Areas: Light Hazard. 2. Minimum Density for Automatic-Sprinkler Piping Design: a. Light-Hazard Occupancy: 0.10 gpm over 1500-sq. ft. area. b. Generator Room and All Storage Areas (Excluding Small Office Supply Storage): Ordinary-Hazard, Group 1 Occupancy: .30 gpm over the entire room. c. Special Occupancy Hazard: As determined by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Maximum Protection Area per Sprinkler: a. Office Spaces: 225 sq. ft. b. Other Areas: According to NFPA 13 recommendations unless otherwise indicated. 2.2 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Schedule 40, Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F, Grade A. Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method. B. Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends. C. Galvanized- and Uncoated-Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865/A 865M, threaded. D. Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern. E. Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860. F. Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125. G. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150. 1. Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick. a. Class 125 and Class 250, Cast-Iron, Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face gaskets. b. Class 150 and Class 300, Ductile-Iron or -Steel, Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type gaskets. 2. Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: Carbon steel unless otherwise indicated. H. Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances: 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company. b. Grinnell. c. Central. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 5 2. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 3. Painted Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M, malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting, with dimensions matching steel pipe. 4. Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213 rigid pattern, unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections, EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts. 2.3 SPECIALTY VALVES A. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." B. Pressure Rating: 1. Standard-Pressure Piping Specialty Valves: 175-psig minimum. C. Body Material: Cast or ductile iron. D. Size: Same as connected piping. E. End Connections: Flanged or grooved. 2.4 SPRINKLER PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Branch Outlet Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Victaulic Company. b. Grinnell. c. Central. 2. Standard: UL 213. 3. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 4. Body Material: Ductile-iron housing with EPDM seals and bolts and nuts. 5. Type: Mechanical-tee and -cross fittings. 6. Configurations: Snap-on and strapless, ductile-iron housing with branch outlets. 7. Size: Of dimension to fit onto sprinkler main and with outlet connections as required to match connected branch piping. 8. Branch Outlets: Grooved, plain-end pipe, or threaded. B. Flexible Sprinkler Hose Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. FlexHead Industries, Inc. b. Victaulic Company. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 6 2. Standard: UL 1474. 3. Type: Flexible hose for connection to sprinkler, and with bracket for connection to ceiling grid. 4. Pressure Rating: 175-psig minimum. 5. Size: Same as connected piping, for sprinkler. 2.5 SPRINKLERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. (The). 2. Tyco Fire & Building Products LP. 3. Viking Corporation. B. Listed in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" or FM Global's "Approval Guide." C. Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175-psig minimum. D. Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element: 1. Early-Suppression, Fast-Response Applications: UL 1767. 2. Nonresidential Applications: UL 199. 3. Characteristics: a. Nominal 1/2-inch orifice with Discharge Coefficient K of 5.6, and for "Ordinary" temperature classification rating unless otherwise indicated or required by application. E. Sprinkler Finishes: Painted. F. Sprinkler Escutcheons: Materials, types, and finishes for the following sprinkler mounting applications. Escutcheons for concealed and flush sprinklers are specified with sprinklers. 1. Ceiling Mounting: Plastic, white finish, one piece, flat. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Sprinkler system is supplied from an existing fire pump. Fire-pump test information can be obtained from Cornell EHS. B. Report test results promptly and in writing. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 7 3.2 WATER-SUPPLY CONNECTIONS A. Connect sprinkler piping to building's sprinkler piping. 3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated on approved working plans. 1. Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Architect before deviating from approved working plans. 2. Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies. B. Piping Standard: Comply with NFPA 13 and FM Global requirements for installation of sprinkler piping. C. Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in pipe sizes. D. Install unions adjacent to each valve in pipes NPS 2 and smaller. E. Install flanges, flange adapters, or couplings for grooved-end piping on valves, apparatus, and equipment having NPS 2-1/2 and larger end connections. F. Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage. G. Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13 and FM Global. H. Fill sprinkler system piping with water. 3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated. B. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe. C. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittin gs before assembly. D. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 8 E. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows: 1. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads. 2. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or damaged. F. Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article. 1. Shop-weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for galvanized-steel pipe. G. Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints. H. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with materials of both piping systems. 3.5 VALVE AND SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION A. Install flush valves on all mains, cross-mains, branch lines, and runouts. Valves sized to achieve NFPA-required minimum velocity of 10 ft/sec. 3.6 SPRINKLER INSTALLATION A. Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels. B. Install sprinklers into flexible, sprinkler hose fittings, and install hose into bracket on ceiling grid. 3.7 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in NFPA 13. 3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections: 1. Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 9 3. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance" Chapter. 4. Coordinate with fire-alarm tests. Operate as required. B. Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. C. Tests shall be witnessed by the following: 1. Ithaca Fire Department. 2. Cornell Environmental Health and Safety. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.9 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers. B. Only sprinklers with their original factory finish are acceptable. Remove and replace any sprinklers that are painted or have any other finish other than their original factory finish. C. Cleaning: 1. PIP System Cleaning: a. Piping with Microbiological Influenced Corrosion (MIC) coatings can be cleaned per the following procedure since MIC has not been found in sprinkler systems on this campus. b. Prior to introducing cleaning chemicals into sprinkler system, protect public water system from sprinkler system with a temporary RPZ (if the system is not already protected by an RPZ). c. Clean all pipe lines or sections of lines and connected equipment in new or modified systems and/or flush free of all pipe line debris loosened or introduced as a result of this Contract. This shall include removing all debris that has settled or collected at low points, in equipment, etc. Test equipment used for pi ping tests may be used to circulate cleaning liquids. d. Clean and disinfect sprinkler distribution piping as follows: 1) Purge new and reused distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use. 2) Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet. 3) Fill system with water/tri-sodium phosphate (TSP) solution containing at least 1 gallon TSP liquid per 1000 gallon of system volume, isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. 4) Drain system of previous solution to sanitary sewer. 5) Flush system with clean, potable water until no TSP remains in water coming from system. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 21 13 13 - 10 6) Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination. 7) Prepare reports of purging and disinfecting activities. 3.10 DEMONSTRATION A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specialty valves. 3.11 PIPING SCHEDULE A. Sprinkler specialty fittings may be used, downstream of control valves, instead of specified fittings. B. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following: 1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. C. Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the following: 1. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded fittings; and threaded joints. 2. Schedule 40, black-steel pipe with roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints. 3.12 SPRINKLER SCHEDULE A. Use sprinkler types in subparagraphs below for the following applications: 1. Rooms without Ceilings: Upright sprinklers. 2. Rooms with Suspended Ceilings: Concealed sprinklers. B. Provide sprinkler types in subparagraphs below with finishes indicated. 1. Concealed Sprinklers: Rough brass, with factory-painted white cover plate. END OF SECTION 21 13 13 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 1 SECTION 23 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Metal pipe hangers and supports. 2. Trapeze pipe hangers. 3. Metal framing systems. 4. Thermal-hanger shield inserts. 5. Fastener systems. 6. Equipment supports. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for structural-steel shapes and plates for trapeze hangers for pipe and equipment supports. 2. Division 23 Section "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design supports for multiple pipes capable of supporting combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water. B. Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported equipment and connected systems and components. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Welding certificates. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 2 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." B. Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. 2. Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped. 3. Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner. 4. Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to support bearing surface of piping. 5. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. B. Copper Pipe Hangers: 1. Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated components. 2. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel. 2.2 TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS A. Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U- bolts. 2.3 METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS A. MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc. c. Flex-Strut Inc. d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut Corporation; Tyco International, Ltd. g. Wesanco, Inc. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 3 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Metallic Coating: Hot-dipped galvanized. B. Non-MFMA Manufacturer Metal Framing Systems: 1. Manufacturers: a. Anvil International; a subsidiary of Mueller Water Products Inc. b. Empire Industries, Inc. c. ERICO International Corporation. d. Haydon Corporation; H-Strut Division. e. NIBCO INC. f. PHD Manufacturing, Inc. g. PHS Industries, Inc. 2. Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels, accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes. 3. Standard: Comply with MFMA-4. 4. Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips. 5. Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel. 6. Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel. 7. Coating: Prime coat. 2.4 THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carpenter & Paterson, Inc. 2. Clement Support Services. 3. ERICO International Corporation. 4. National Pipe Hanger Corporation. 5. PHS Industries, Inc. 6. Pipe Shields, Inc.; a subsidiary of Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 7. Piping Technology & Products, Inc. 8. Rilco Manufacturing Co., Inc. 9. Value Engineered Products, Inc. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 4 B. Insulation-Insert Material for Cold Piping: ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig or ASTM C 591, Type VI, Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength and vapor barrier. C. For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe. D. For Clevis or Band Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe. E. Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield for piping operating below ambient air temperature. 2.5 FASTENER SYSTEMS A. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. B. Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated steel anchors, for use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 2.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbon- steel shapes. 2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. B. Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, non-shrink and nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications. 1. Properties: Non-staining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous. 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building structure. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 5 B. Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field -fabricated trapeze pipe hangers. 1. Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe hangers. 2. Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M. C. Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and support together on field-assembled metal framing systems. D. Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping. E. Fastener System Installation: 1. Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. 2. Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions. F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. G. Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes. H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units. I. Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying. J. Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 6 M. Insulated Piping: 1. Attach clamps and spacers to piping. a. Piping Operating Above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through insulation. b. Piping Operating Below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert. c. Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping. 2. Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees. a. Option: Thermal-hanger shield inserts may be used. Include steel weight- distribution plate for pipe NPS 4 and larger if pipe is installed on rollers. 3. Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following: a. NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick. b. NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. c. NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick. d. NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick. e. NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick. 4. Thermal-Hanger Shields: Install with insulation same thickness as piping insulation. 3.2 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support equipment above floor. B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth. C. Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports. 3.3 METAL FABRICATIONS A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports. B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding; appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the following: CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 7 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe. B. Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods. 3.5 PAINTING A. Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. 1. Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas a nd apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780. 3.6 HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE A. Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and equipment. B. Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. C. Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will not have field-applied finish. D. Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachment s are in direct contact with copper tubing. E. Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing systems and attachments for general service applications. F. Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper attachments for copper piping and tubing. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 8 G. Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching. H. Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for chilled-water and condenser-water insulated piping and tubing. I. Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of non-insulated or insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30. 2. Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel- pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate. 3. Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and with U-bolt to retain pipe. 4. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange. J. Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24. 2. Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps. K. Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads. 2. Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. 3. Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings. 4. Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of building attachments. 5. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations. L. Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend pipe hangers from concrete ceiling. 2. Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape. 3. Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams, channels, or angles. 4. Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams. 5. Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads are considerable and rod sizes are large. 6. C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 9 7. Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to flange edge. 8. Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams. 9. Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads. 10. Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel I- beams for heavy loads, with link extensions. 11. Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to structural steel. 12. Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads: a. Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb. b. Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb. c. Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb. 13. Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams. 14. Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required. 15. Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear horizontal movement where headroom is limited. M. Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with insulation that matches adjoining insulation. 2. Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer to prevent crushing insulation. 3. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe. N. Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system Sections, install the following types: 1. Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement. 2. Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed 1-1/4 inches. 3. Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with springs. 4. Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal expansion in piping systems. 5. Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger. 6. Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from base support. 7. Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from trapeze support. 8. Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 - 10 auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These supports include the following types: a. Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally. b. Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically. c. Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member. O. Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. P. Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not specified in piping system Sections. Q. Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building attachments where required in concrete construction. END OF SECTION 23 05 29 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 1 SECTION 23 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Duct labels. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTAL A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCT LABELS A. Material and Thickness: Multilayer, multicolor, plastic labels for mechanical engraving, 1/16 inch thick, and having predrilled holes for attachment hardware. B. Maximum Temperature: Able to withstand temperatures up to 160 deg F. C. Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than 2-1/2 by 3/4 inch. D. Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the size of principal lettering. E. Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws. F. Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate. G. Duct Label Contents: Include identification of duct service using same designations or abbreviations as used on Drawings, duct size, and an arrow indicating flow direction. 1. Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with duct system service lettering to accommodate both directions, or as separate unit on each duct label to indicate flow direction. 2. Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53 - 2 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT LABEL INSTALLATION A. Install self-adhesive duct labels with permanent adhesive on air ducts. B. Coordinate color schedule for each duct system with Medical Center standard. C. Locate labels near points where ducts enter into concealed spaces and at maximum intervals of 50 feet in each space where ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system. END OF SECTION 23 05 53 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 1 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Balancing Air Systems: a. Variable-air-volume systems, including existing-to-remain AHU as required. 2. Balancing Hydronic Piping Systems: a. Variable-flow hydronic systems, including exiting-to-remain pumps as required. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. B. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. C. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. D. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Strategies and Procedures Plan: Within 60 days of Contractor's Notice to Proceed, submit TAB strategies and step-by-step procedures as specified in "Preparation" Article. B. Certified TAB reports. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. TAB Contractor Qualifications: Engage a TAB entity certified by AABC or NEBB. 1. TAB Field Supervisor: Employee of the TAB contractor and certified by AABC or NEBB. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 2 2. TAB Technician: Employee of the TAB contractor and who is certified by AABC or NEBB as a TAB technician. B. Certify TAB field data reports and perform the following: 1. Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB reports. 2. Certify that the TAB team complied with the approved TAB plan and the procedures specified and referenced in this Specification. C. TAB Report Forms: Use standard TAB contractor's forms approved by Commissioning Authority. D. Instrumentation Type, Quantity, Accuracy, and Calibration: As described in ASHRAE 111, Section 5, "Instrumentation." E. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." F. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.7.2.3 - "System Balancing." PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment. B. Examine systems for installed balancing devices, such as balancing valves and fittings, and manual volume dampers. Verify that locations of these balancing devices are accessible. C. Examine the approved submittals for HVAC systems and equipment. D. Examine design data including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls. E. Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. 1. Relate performance data to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. 2. Calculate system-effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under conditions different from the conditions used to rate equipment CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 3 performance. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201, "Fans and Systems," or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems - Duct Design." Compare results with the design data and installed conditions. F. Examine system and equipment installations and verify that field quality-control testing, cleaning, and adjusting specified in individual Sections have been performed. G. Examine test reports specified in individual system and equipment Sections. H. Examine HVAC equipment and filters and verify that bearings are greased, belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation. I. Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, and verify that they are accessible and their controls are connected and functioning. J. Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins. K. Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping. L. Examine operating safety interlocks and controls on HVAC equipment. M. Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from indicated values. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures. B. Complete system-readiness checks and prepare reports. Verify the following: 1. Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air. 2. Automatic temperature-control systems are operational. 3. Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed. 4. Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open. 5. Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational. 6. Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and access to balancing devices is provided. 7. Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be met. 3.3 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained in AABC's "National Standards for Total System Balance" and NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems" and in this Section. 1. Comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 7.2.2 - "Air Balancing." CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 4 B. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary for TAB procedures. 1. After testing and balancing, patch probe holes in ducts with same material and thickness as used to construct ducts. 2. Install and join new insulation that matches removed materials. Restore insulation, coverings, vapor barrier, and finish according to Section 23 07 13 "Insulation and Lagging." C. Mark equipment and balancing devices, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speed-control levers, and similar controls and devices, with paint or other suitable, permanent identification material to show final settings. D. Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units. 3.4 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with required fan volumes. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts. C. For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity. D. Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct-airflow measurements. E. Check airflow patterns from the outdoor-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air dampers through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers. F. Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path. G. Check for airflow blockages. 3.5 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS A. Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a minimum set-point airflow with the remainder at maximum airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the fan. Select the reduced-airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch ducts. B. Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows: 1. Set outdoor-air dampers at minimum, and set return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position that simulates full-cooling load. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 5 2. Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure. Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of the terminal-unit manufacturer's recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome terminal-unit discharge system losses. 3. Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow. 4. Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream from terminal units the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 5. Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow the same as described for constant-volume air systems. a. If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave outlets balanced for maximum airflow. 6. Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and minimum outdoor airflow. a. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets the same as described for constant-volume air systems. 7. Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is maintained at the most critical unit. 8. Record final fan-performance data. 3.6 GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Prepare test reports with pertinent design data, and number in sequence starting at pump to end of system. Check the sum of branch-circuit flows against the approved pump flow rate. Correct variations that exceed plus or minus 5 percent. B. Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts. C. Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the general preparation procedures specified above: 1. Open all manual valves for maximum flow. 2. Set differential-pressure control valves at the specified differential pressure. Do not set at fully closed position when pump is positive-displacement type unless several terminal valves are kept open. 3. Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers. 4. Check pump-motor load. If motor is overloaded, throttle main flow-balancing device so motor nameplate rating is not exceeded. 5. Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 6 3.7 PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS A. Balance systems with automatic two-way control valves by setting systems at maximum flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems. 3.8 PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS A. Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data: 1. Manufacturer's name, model number, and serial number. 2. Motor horsepower rating. 3. Motor rpm. 4. Efficiency rating. 5. Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase. 6. Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase. 7. Starter thermal-protection-element rating. B. Motors Driven by Variable-Frequency Controllers: Test for proper operation at speeds varying from minimum to maximum. Test the manual bypass of the controller to prove proper operation. Record observations including name of controller manufacturer, model number, serial number, and nameplate data. 3.9 PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS A. Measure, adjust, and record the following data for each water coil: 1. Water flow rate. 3.10 TOLERANCES A. Set HVAC system's air flow rates and water flow rates within the following tolerances: 1. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: Plus or minus 10 percent. 2. Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3. Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 4. Cooling-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent. 3.11 FINAL REPORT A. General: Prepare a certified written report; tabulate and divide the report into separate sections for tested systems and balanced systems. 1. Include a certification sheet at the front of the report's binder, signed and sealed by the certified testing and balancing engineer. 2. Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 93 - 7 B. Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field-report data, include the following: 1. Manufacturers' test data. 2. Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers. 3. Other information relative to equipment performance; do not include Shop Drawings and product data. C. General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data: 1. Title page. 2. Name and address of the TAB contractor. 3. Project name. 4. Project location. 5. Architect's name and address. 6. Engineer's name and address. 7. Contractor's name and address. 8. Report date. 9. Signature of TAB supervisor who certifies the report. 10. Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report. Number each page in the report. 11. Summary of contents including the following: a. Indicated versus final performance. b. Notable characteristics of systems. c. Description of system operation sequence if it varies from the Contract Documents. 12. Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment. 13. Data for terminal units and air valves, including manufacturer's name, type, size, and fittings. 14. Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports vary from indicated values. 15. Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following: a. Settings for outdoor-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers. b. Conditions of filters. c. Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions. d. Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter. e. Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller. f. Other system operating conditions that affect performance. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 1 SECTION 23 07 13 - INSULATION AND LAGGING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 DEFINITIONS A.Air-conditioned space: Space directly supplied with heated or cooled air. B.Cold: Systems handling media at design temperature of 60oF or below. C.Hot: Ductwork handling air at design temperature above 60o F; equipment or piping handling media above 105oF. D.Exposed: Piping, ductwork, and equipment exposed to view in finished areas including mechanical and electrical equipment rooms. Shafts, chases, interstitial spaces, crawl spaces, and pipe basements are not considered finished areas. E.Lagging: Acoustical duct wrap. F.Pcf: Density, pounds per cubic foot. G.Thermal conductance: Heat flow rate through materials. 1.Flat surface: Btu per hour per square foot. 2.Pipe or cylinder: Btu per hour per linear foot. H.Thermal conductivity (K): Btu per inch thickness, per hour, per square foot, per degree Fahrenheit temperature difference. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Qualified Installers: 1.Insulation shall be installed by technicians regularly engaged in this type of work for a minimum period of 2 years. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 2 B.Materials used for similar-type systems shall be of the same manufacturer and style of insulating material and covering. All material and workmanship shall be subject to inspection and shall meet requirements of NFPA 90A and 90B. C.Materials shall not exceed a flame-spread rating of 25 and a smoke-developed rating of 50. D.Accessories for fittings, such as covers, adhesive, mastics, cements, tapes, and high temperature cloth, shall have the same component ratings as listed above. Any treatment of jackets or facings to impart flame and smoke safety shall be permanent. The use of water-soluble treatments is not permitted. E.Specified thermal conductivity ("K") factors are at 75oF mean temperature unless stated otherwise. Where optional insulation material is used, select thickness to provide thermal conductance no greater than that for the specified material. For pipe, use insulation manufacturer's published heat flow tables. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A.Submit Shop Drawings on all items listed in Part 2, “Products.” Include a schedule of insulation applications. B.The insulation contractor shall certify in writing, prior to installation, that all products to be used will meet the criteria specified in this Section. C.Submit UL listing that demonstrates surface-burning characteristics for materials to be used do not exceed specified ratings. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A.Fiberglass Pipe and Duct insulation: Johns Manville or Knauf. B.Adhesives: 3M, Benjamin Foster ("BF"), or Schuller. C.Fitting Covers: Proto, Zeston, or Foster. D.Flexible Elastomeric: Armacell LLC or Schuller. E.Sound Lagging: 1.Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Sound Seal #B-10 LAG/QFA-3 or approved equal. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 3 2.2 APPLICATIONS A.Provide piping and ductwork insulation as scheduled and specified. PIPING APPLICATION SCHEDULE SERVICE PIPE SIZE THICKNESS AND TYPE Interior, hydronic heating 1.5 inches and smaller 1-inch fiberglass 2 inches and larger 1.5-inch fiberglass DUCTWORK APPLICATION SCHEDULE SERVICE INSULATION THICKNESS (INCHES) THICKNESS AND TYPE Exposed supply-air ductwork in non- conditioned spaced 1.5 Rigid fiberglass board, 3.0 lb/cu. ft. density, minimum R-value of 5, complete with factory- reinforced aluminum-foil vapor barrier, suitably anchored and sealed at all points. Concealed supply-air ductwork in non- conditioned spaces 1.5 Fiberglass blanket, .75 lb/cu. ft. density, minimum R- value of 5, complete with factory-applied vapor barrier, suitably anchored and sealed at all points. Return-air ductwork 1.0 1-lb psf sound lagging where shown on Drawings. Exhaust-air ductwork --Not insulated 2.3 INSULATION FACINGS AND JACKETS A.Type 1, low vapor transmission (0.02 perm rating), Beach puncture 50 units for insulation facing on exposed ductwork, casings, and equipment and for pipe insulation jackets: Facings and jackets shall be white, all-service type (ASJ) suitable for painting without sizing. B.Type 2, medium vapor transmission, Beach puncture 25 units: Foil-Scrim-Kraft ("FSK") type for concealed ductwork and equipment. C.Presized glass cloth jacket, Beach puncture 100 units: Not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard with integral vapor barrier where required. D.Fire and smoke treatment of jackets and facings shall be permanent. The use of water-soluble treatments is not acceptable. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 4 E.Pipe insulation jackets shall have 1-1/2" minimum lap at longitudinal joint and not less than 3" butt strips at end joints. Facing on board, blanket and block insulation, shall have 2" laps or 3" minimum butt strips. Butt strip material shall be the same as the jacket or facing. Laps and butt strips may be self-sealing type with factory-applied pressure-sensitive adhesive. Provide outward-clinching staples after sealing laps and butt strips. 2.4 RIGID-TYPE FIBERGLASS PIPE INSULATION A.Preformed sectional-type fiberglass; K factor of 0.23 at 75oF mean temperature. Provide with Type 1 ASJ jacket. B.Fittings and valves: Molded or mitered fittings insulation same thickness as adjoining pipe insulation. 2.5 FLEXIBLE-TYPE ELASTOMERIC UNICELLULAR PIPE INSULATION A.Material: K = 0.30; flame-spread rating of 25; smoke-developed rating of 50 maximum; for temperatures from -40oF to 200oF, no jacket is required. 2.6 FLEXIBLE BLANKET-TYPE DUCT INSULATION A.Description: .75-pcf density, K = 0.28, for temperatures up to 350oF and for concealed ductwork with Type 2 FSK jacket. 2.7 RIGID BOARD-TYPE DUCT INSULATION A.Fiberglass, 3.0 pcf, semi-rigid board with factory-applied fire-resistant vapor barrier, minimum thermal conductivity factor of K = 0.26 for temperatures to 400oF. Provide with Type 1 ASJ jacket. 2.8 INSULATION ACCESSORY MATERIALS A.Insulation Inserts at Pipe Supports: Cellular glass, calcium silicate, or mineral fiber; 9.0-pcf minimum density; same thickness as adjacent insulation. B.Mechanical Fasteners: 1.Pins and Anchors: Welded pins of metal, or nylon anchors, with tin-coated or fiber washer or clips. Pin diameter shall be as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 2.Wire: 18-gauge soft annealed galvanized, or 14-gauge copper clad steel or nickel-copper alloy. 3.Bands: 3/4-inch nominal width in galvanized steel or aluminum. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 5 C.Reinforcement and Finishes: 1.Fiberglass fabric, open weave: Resin- or asphalt-treated. 2.Fiberglass fitting tape. 3.Tape for flexible unicellular insulation as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. 4.Hexagonal wire netting: 1" mesh, 22-gauge galvanized steel. 5.Corner beads: 2" shall be 26-gauge galvanized steel, or 1" x 1" shall be 28-gauge aluminum angle adhered to 2" x 2" Kraft paper. 6.PVC fitting cover (optional indoor application) for media temperature 40oF to 250oF. Below 40oF and above 250oF, provide double-layer insert. Provide color-matching, vapor barrier, pressure-sensitive tape (Zeston or approved equal). D.Fitting Covers: 1.PVC fitting covers may be used provided that minimum insulating values previously defined are adhered to and that systems provided meet applicable requirements of NFPA. 2.Provide color-matched, vapor barrier, pressure-sensitive tape at fitting covers. 2.9 ACOUSTICAL PIPE AND DUCT LAGGING–GENERAL (SOUND LAGGING) A.Acoustical pipe and duct lagging shall be a 1-lb-psf mass loaded vinyl noise barrier with a reinforced foil facing on one side, bonded to a 1-inch-thick, non-woven, porous, scrim-faced, quilted fiberglass decoupler on the opposite side. 1.Quilted Fiberglass Decoupler: a.Nominally 1 inch thick. b.Nominal density of 3.0-lb/cu. ft. c.Quilted with a non-woven, porous, scrim facing. 2.Standard Width: 54 inches. 3.Length: As indicated, up to 30-ft long, 4.Flammability: a.Rating: Class A flammability, b.Flame Spread Index: Less than 15, c.Smoke Density: Less than 20. B.Acoustical Performance: 1.Sound Transmission Loss: In accordance with ASTM E90. 2.Octave Band Center Frequency (Hz): 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 STC 18 18 23 30 39 46 29 CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 6 C.Accessories for Securely Mounting the Acoustical Pipe and Duct Lagging: 1. Foil lag tape. 2.Stick pins. 3.Welding pins. 4.Banding. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A.Provide insulation after systems have been tested. Apply to pipes with side and end joints butted tightly. B.Adhere the factory-applied vapor-barrier jacket smoothly and securely at joints with a fire- resistant vapor-barrier adhesive (BF #85-75). C.Adhere 4-inch-wide strips of jacket material smoothly and securely over all end joints with vapor-barrier adhesive to ensure a continuous vapor barrier. D.At joints in insulation and at hangers, seal the vapor barrier with adhesive as required to reduce moisture penetration. E.Install insulation and adhesives in accordance with requirements of NFPA. F.Provide insulation for entire systems of equipment, piping, and ductwork. Insulate each pipe and duct individually. Do not use scrap pieces of insulation where a full-length section will fit. "Butter" the ends of insulation for a neat and workmanlike appearance. G.Insulation shall be installed with smooth, even surfaces and with jackets and facings drawn tight and smoothly adhered at all laps with adhesive. Insulation shall be continuous through all sleeves and openings. Vapor barriers shall be continuous throughout systems with operating temperature 60oF and below. Lap and seal vapor barrier over ends and exposed edges of insulation. Anchors, supports, and other metal projections through insulation on cold surfaces shall be insulated and vapor-sealed for a minimum length of 6". H.External insulation shall be terminated at items not requiring insulation as follows: 1.HVAC work not to be insulated: a.Internally insulated ductwork and air-handling units. 2.Access openings, inspection stamps, equipment nameplates. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 7 I.Apply insulation materials subject to the manufacturer's recommendations. Apply adhesives and coatings at the manufacturer's recommended minimum coverage or spacing. 3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION A.Board Type: 1.Apply board on pins spaced not more than 12" on center each duct dimension and not less than 3" from each edge. In addition to pins, apply adhesive to entire underside of horizontal metal surfaces. Butt insulation edges tightly, and seal joints. After applying washers, cut pins off flush and apply vapor seal patches over clips. 2.Insulation shall be scored, beveled, or mitered to provide tight joints and secured to equipment with bands spaced 9" on center for irregular surfaces or with pins and clips on flat surfaces. Use corner beads to protect edges of insulation. 3.Chilled-water pumps: Insulate with removable and replaceable 20-gauge aluminum or galvanized steel covers lined with insulation. Seal closure joints/flanges of covers with gasket material. B.Flexible Blanket Type: Adhere insulation to ductwork with pins welded or adhered on 18" on centers. Secure washers on pins. Butt insulation edges, and seal joints with laps and butt strips. Seal all vapor-barrier penetrations with mastic. Sagging duct insulation will not be acceptable. Install rock wool duct insulation where required. C.Rigid Pipe Insulation: 1.Stagger longitudinal joints and seal with adhesive. Seal all vapor-barrier penetrations on cold piping with a generous application of vapor-barrier mastic. Provide inserts and install with metal insulation shields at outside pipe supports. 2.Jackets for hot piping shall be factory-applied, white, all-service jackets, composed of reinforced kraft paper and a self-seal, pressure-sensitive longitudinal lap seal. D.Insulation of Fittings and Specialties: 1.Insulation shall be installed throughout the length of equipment and piping, including fittings, valves, and specialties. Except for removable covers on pumps, insulation shall be permanently installed on all piping specialties, such as valves, flanges, unions, P/T test ports, strainers, control valves including actuators and gear boxes, low-point drain valves. 2.A label shall be provided to identify each fitting or specialty. E.Pipe and Duct Insulation at Penetrations of Fire or Smoke Barriers: 1.Wrap pipe or duct with rock wool pipe insulation, seal jacket seam, and seal end joints to adjacent sections of insulation. 2.Seal opening between insulation and pipe sleeve with firestopping material. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs INSULATION AND LAGGING 23 07 13 - 8 F.Flexible Elastomeric Unicellular Insulation: 1.Apply insulation and fabricate fittings in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.Use pre-molded roll on pipe sizes 3.5" and smaller. 3.Use either pre-molded roll or sheet on pipe sizes 4" and larger, adhere insulation on 100% of the pipe. This requirement exceeds the typical industry standard of adhering to lower one-third of pipe on horizontal runs. 4.Match thickness of fiberglass insulation on all pipe sizes. For piping requiring 1.5"-thick insulation using sheet product, provide 2 layers of 3/4"-thick insulation. 5.No exposed cross-section edges are permitted. 6.Pipe and Tubing Insulation: a.Use proper size material. Do not stretch or strain insulation. b.To avoid undue compression of insulation, provide work inserts at supports as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. c.Where possible, slip insulation over the pipe or tubing prior to connection and seal the butt joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible, slit the insulation and apply it to the pipe sealing the seam and joints with contact adhesive. Optional tape sealing, as recommended by the manufacturer, may be employed. 7.Apply sheet insulation with 100% adhesive coverage for all applications. G.Sound Lagging: 1.Provide welding pins, foil lag tape, washers, and banding as required to install lagging according to manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 23 07 13 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 1 SECTION 23 09 23 – BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. DDC system for monitoring and controlling of HVAC systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Algorithm: A logical procedure for solving a recurrent mathematical problem. A prescribed set of well-defined rules or processes for solving a problem in a finite number of steps. B. Analog: A continuously varying signal value, such as current, flow, pressure, or temperature. C. BACnet-Specific Definitions: 1. BACnet: Building Automation Control Network Protocol, ASHRAE 135. A communications protocol allowing devices to communicate data over and services over a network. 2. BACnet Interoperability Building Blocks (BIBBs): BIBB defines a small portion of BACnet functionality that is needed to perform a particular task. BIBBs are combined to build the BACnet functional requirements for a device. 3. BACnet/IP: Defines and allows using a reserved UDP socket to transmit BACnet messages over IP networks. A BACnet/IP network is a collection of one or more IP subnetworks that share the same BACnet network number. 4. BACnet Testing Laboratories (BTL): Organization responsible for testing products for compliance with ASHRAE 135, operated under direction of BACnet International. 5. PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement): Written document that identifies the particular options specified by BACnet that are implemented in a device. D. Binary: Two-state signal where a high signal level represents ON" or "OPEN" condition and a low signal level represents "OFF" or "CLOSED" condition. "Digital" is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary" to indicate a two-state signal. E. Controller: Generic term for any standalone, microprocessor-based, digital controller residing on a network, used for local or global control. Three types of controllers are indicated: Network Controller, Programmable Application Controller, and Application-Specific Controller. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 2 F. Control System Integrator: An entity that assists in expansion of existing enterprise system and support of additional operator interfaces to I/O being added to existing enterprise system. G. COV: Changes of value. H. DDC System Provider: Authorized representative of, and trained by, DDC system manufacturer and responsible for execution of DDC system Work indicated. I. Distributed Control: Processing of system data is decentralized and control decisions are made at subsystem level. System operational programs and information are provided to remote subsystems and status is reported back. On loss of communication, subsystems shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode using the last best available data. J. DOCSIS: Data-Over Cable Service Interface Specifications. K. E/P: Voltage to pneumatic. L. Gateway: Bidirectional protocol translator that connects control systems that use different communication protocols. M. HLC: Heavy load conditions. N. I/O: System through which information is received and transmitted. I/O refers to analog input (AI), binary input (BI), analog output (AO) and binary output (BO). Analog signals are continuous and represent control influences such as flow, level, moisture, p ressure, and temperature. Binary signals convert electronic signals to digital pulses (values) and generally represent two-position operating and alarm status. "Digital," (DI and (DO), is sometimes used interchangeably with "Binary," (BI) and (BO), respectively. O. I/P: Current to pneumatic. P. LAN: Local area network. Q. Low Voltage: As defined in NFPA 70 for circuits and equipment operating at less than 50 V or for remote-control, signaling power-limited circuits. R. Modbus TCP/IP: An open protocol for exchange of process data. S. MTBF: Mean time between failures. T. Network Controller: Digital controller, which supports a family of programmable application controllers and application-specific controllers, that communicates on peer-to-peer network for transmission of global data. U. Network Repeater: Device that receives data packet from one network and rebroadcasts it to another network. No routing information is added to protocol. V. PDA: Personal digital assistant. W. Peer to Peer: Networking architecture that treats all network stations as equal partners. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 3 X. POT: Portable operator's terminal. Y. PUE: Performance usage effectiveness. Z. RAM: Random access memory. AA. RF: Radio frequency. BB. Router: Device connecting two or more networks at network layer. CC. Server: Computer used to maintain system configuration, historical and programming database. DD. TCP/IP: Transport control protocol/Internet protocol incorporated into Microsoft Windows. EE. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply. FF. USB: Universal Serial Bus. GG. User Datagram Protocol (UDP): This protocol assumes that the IP is used as the underlying protocol. HH. VAV: Variable air volume. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data for each control device, panel, controller, and accessory furnished indicating dimensions, capacities, performance and electrical characteristics, and material finishes. Also include installation, start-up, calibration, and maintenance instructions as well as all cable and tubing requirements. B. Control-System Architecture Diagram: Submit a system architecture one-line diagram indicating schematic location of all controllers, workstations, LAN interface devices, gateways, etc. The BACS vendor shall indicate address and type for each control unit; as well as indicate physical media, protocol, communication speed, and type of each LAN. C. Floor Plans: Submit a set of floor plans with all controllers/control panels, sensors, operator workstations, interface devices, UPSs, etc., located and identified. The BACS vendor shall indicate all network components (repeaters, routers, etc.); network wiring shall be shown and identified on the floor plan drawings. D. Detailed Wiring Diagrams: Include detailed wiring. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor starter, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on the system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to be field-installed. All wiring of related components that make up a system shall be grouped together in one diagram (e.g., all wiring diagrams for the components and devices on a particular AHU shall be shown on one CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 4 drawing. The supply fan components and devices should not be shown separate from return fan components and devices, etc.). E. Sample Graphics and Trends: Submit draft samples of the actual graphics to be used for the project. F. Operation and Maintenance Materials: Submit Operation and Maintenance (O&M) materials generally in concert with training. O&M materials shall include the following 1. Maintenance instructions and spare parts list for each type of control device, control unit, and accessory. 2. BACS User’s Guides (Operating Manuals) for each controller type and for all workstation hardware and software and workstation peripheral. 3. BACS Programming Manuals for each controller type and for all workstation software. 4. All information provided during the submittal phase; updated with as-built information. As-built panel drawings shall also be included as part of the O&M manual process. The drawings that are located in each panel shall incorporate all the systems controlled from that particular panel. The drawings shall include the system schematic and detailed panel wiring diagram. Also included (typically noted on the system schematic diagrams) should be the specific locations of any remote devices such as remote static pressure sensors, differential pressure sensors, etc. 5. Each control panel on the project shall include an as -built hard copy of all drawings and documentation associated with that panel and its field devices. This documentation shall be provided in a plastic protective pocket mounted inside the panel door. 6. The final as-built controls drawings (PDF) shall also be accessible via the web-based graphics. G. Software Submittal: 1. Cross-referenced listing of software to be loaded on each operator workstation, server, gateway, and DDC controller. 2. Description and technical data of all software provided, and cross -referenced to products in which software will be installed. 3. Operating system software, operator interface and programming software, color graphic software, DDC controller software, maintenance management software, and third -party software. 4. Include a flow diagram and an outline of each subroutine that indicates each program variable name and units of measure. 5. Listing and description of each engineering equation used with reference source. 6. Listing and description of each constant used in engineering equations and a reference source to prove origin of each constant. 7. Description of operator interface to alphanumeric and graphic programming. 8. Description of each network communication protocol. 9. Description of system database, including all data included in database, database capacity and limitations to expand database. 10. Description of each application program and device drivers to be generated, including specific information on data acquisition and control strategies showing their relationship to system timing, speed, processing burden and system throughout. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 5 11. Controlled Systems: Instrumentation list with element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram. H. Shop Drawings: 1. General Requirements: a. Include cover drawing with Project name, location, Owner, Architect, Contractor and issue date with each Shop Drawings submission. b. Include a drawing index sheet listing each drawing number and title that matche s information in each title block. c. Prepare Drawings using CAD. 2. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details where applicable. 3. Include details of product assemblies. Indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 4. Plan Drawings indicating the following: a. Screened backgrounds of walls, structural grid lines, HVAC equipment, ductwork and piping. b. Room names and numbers with coordinated placement to avoid interference with control products indicated. c. Each desktop operator workstation, server, gateway, router, DDC controller, control panel instrument connecting to DDC controller, and damper and valve connecting to DDC controller, if included in Project. d. Exact placement of products in rooms, ducts, and piping to reflect proposed installed condition. e. Network communication cable and raceway routing. f. Proposed routing of wiring, cabling, conduit, and tubing, coordinated with building services for review before installation. 5. Schematic drawings for each controlled HVAC system indicating the following: a. I/O points labeled with point names shown. Indicate instrument range, normal operating set points, and alarm set points. Indicate fail position of each damper and valve. b. I/O listed in table format showing point name, type of device, manufacturer, model number, and cross-reference to product data sheet number. c. A graphic showing location of control I/O in proper relationship to HVAC system. d. Wiring diagram with each I/O point having a unique identification and indicating labels for all wiring terminals. e. Unique identification of each I/O that shall be consistently used between different drawings showing same point. f. Elementary wiring diagrams of controls for HVAC equipment motor circuits including interlocks, switches, relays and interface to DDC controllers. g. Narrative sequence of operation. h. Graphic sequence of operation, showing all inputs and output logical blocks. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 6 6. Control panel drawings indicating the following: a. Panel dimensions, materials, size, and location of field cable, raceways, and connections. b. Interior subpanel layout, drawn to scale and showing all internal components, cabling and wiring raceways, nameplates and allocated spare space. c. Front, rear, and side elevations and nameplate legend. d. Unique drawing for each panel. 7. DDC system network riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each device connected to network with unique identification for each. b. Interconnection of each different network in DDC system. c. For each network, indicate communication protocol, speed and physical means of interconnecting network devices, such as copper cable type, or fiber -optic cable type. Indicate raceway type and size for each. d. Each network port for connection of an operator workstation or other type of operator interface with unique identification for each. 8. DDC system electrical power riser diagram indicating the following: a. Each point of connection to field power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. b. Each control power supply including, as applicable, transformers, power -line conditioners, transient voltage suppression and high filter noise units, DC power supplies, and UPS units with unique identification for each. c. Each product requiring power with requirements (volts/phase//hertz/amperes/connection type) listed for each. d. Power wiring type and size, race type, and size for each. 9. Monitoring and control signal diagrams indicating the following: a. Control signal cable and wiring between controllers and I/O. b. Point-to-point schematic wiring diagrams for each product. 10. Color graphics indicating the following: a. Itemized list of color graphic displays to be provided. b. For each display screen to be provided, a true color copy showing layout of pictures, graphics and data displayed. c. Intended operator access between related hierarchical display screens. I. System Description: 1. Full description of DDC system architecture, network configuration, operator int erfaces and peripherals, servers, controller types and applications, gateways, routers and other network devices, and power supplies. 2. Complete listing and description of each report, log and trend for format and timing and events which initiate generation. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 7 3. System and product operation under each potential failure condition including, but not limited to, the following: a. Loss of power. b. Loss of network communication signal. c. Loss of controller signals to inputs and outpoints. d. Operator workstation failure. e. Server failure. f. Gateway failure. g. Network failure h. Controller failure. i. Instrument failure. j. Control damper and valve actuator failure. 4. Complete bibliography of documentation and media to be delivered to Owner. 5. Description of testing plans and procedures. 6. Description of Owner training. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 CONTROLLERS A. General: The control system shall consist of an inter-network of controllers. It is intended to allow cost-effective application of manufacturers’ standard products while maintaining the integrity and reliability of the control functions commensurate with their application. B. Building- and system-level controllers shall be capable of operating independently, in stand- alone fashion, with no communication to other devices on the network while performing their monitoring and control routines using programs and operating parameters stored in the controllers’ memory. All points and functions that make up a functional system (typically that are shown on one control schematic) shall be included in one controller to qualify for this stand- alone functionality. C. Where control sequences depend on global variables such as outside-air temperature, the controller shall have the capability of either using the last value or a default value. Examples of required functional point groupings are as follows: 1. All points and functions required to control an air handler with all directly associated supply, return, and exhaust fans. This excludes the terminals that may be associated with that air handler. Values that may be received across the network include humidity, terminal-based reset parameters, and smoke modes. 2. All points associated with the supply side of a hydronic system such as pumps, flow meters, temperature and pressure sensors, proof indications, valves, etc. This excludes the terminals on that hydronic system. Values that may be received across the network include outside-air temperature and humidity, emergency power source indication, and terminal-based reset parameters. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 8 3. All points and functions required to control one terminal system including dampers, valves, flow meters, temperature and humidity sensors, etc. This does not include the scheduling period or any outside air that may be necessary for control. D. Controller software must be capable of detecting hardware and software failures and forcing all outputs to a predetermined state, consistent with the failure mode requirements defined on the drawings. In this state it shall issue an alarm. E. Controllers must include sufficient memory for all required operation and all required trending, when trending is buffered in the controller. Where control system operation is hindered by the shortage of memory, contractor shall, at no cost to the Owner, either upgrade the memory or provide multiple controllers. The mix of points for multiple controllers shall not violate the stand-alone requirements. F. Volatile memory is required to be backed up in the event of power loss. Software stored in non - volatile memory will not have to be downloaded from the central server after an interruption of power occurs. G. Controllers used for time-scheduled operations must be equipped with a battery backed internal real-time clock function to provide a time base for implementing time-dependent programs. Provision shall be made for the routine updating of the controllers’ clocks via a time master. H. Resumption of power after an outage shall cause the controllers to automatically restart and establish communications as needed by their applications. Controller shutdown based on a self- diagnosed failure in the power supply, hardware, or software must set each piece of controlled equipment to a predetermined failure mode. I. Controllers shall be powered from the most reliable source that powers any of the systems it serves. In the situation where a controller will be required to continuously collect data to be transmitted to a workstation, or where it monitors critical recovery information such as the presence of emergency power, it may be necessary to provide a UPS for the controller as well as any critical sensors. Where panels are provided with a different power source as the equipment (such as when the panel is on a UPS), the panel shall be provided with a means of monitoring the power source to the controlled equipment. This can be a dedicated power monitor or a value coming from transfer switch contacts. 2.2 SENSORS A. General: All sensors and transmitters shall be located in accessible locations that do not require system shutdown for calibration. Locate all remote transmitters in control panels 5' above finished floor. B. Temperature Sensors: 1. Sensor Resolution: When matched with A/D converter of the controller, sensor range shall provide a resolution of no less than 0.4°F (unless noted otherwise). 2. Room Temperature Sensor: These shall be an element contained within a ventilated cover, suitable for wall mounting. Provide an insulated base. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 9 a. Sensing element: RTD or thermistor, +/- 0.8°F accuracy at calibration point. b. Setpoint Adjustment: Provide where indicated. Public spaces shall not have setpoint adjustment. The setpoint adjustment shall be a warmer/cooler indication that shall be scalable via the BACS. c. Occupancy Override: Provide a button on the room sensor enclosure where indicated, generally in office spaces that do not have occupancy sensors. Public spaces shall not have occupancy override. This shall be a momentary contact closure. d. Display: Alphanumeric. e. Sensors shall be provided with communication jack and appropriate cabling for connection to the BACS. C. Air Differential-Pressure Sensors: 1. General: Pressure transducers shall be either diaphragm or strain gauge types. 2. Applications: Duct static pressure. 3. Provide the smallest range feasible for the application. Provide zero and span adjustments. 4. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1% of full scale for static and 0.25% for air velocity. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. General and Static Pressure: Mamac, Setra, Veris Industries D. Air Differential-Pressure Switches 1. Cleveland Controls, Inc., products shall be used. The switches shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation instructions. All switches shall be mounted in accessible and, to the extent possible, vibration-free locations (i.e., not on duct work). E. Airflow Sensors: 1. Flow sensors shall be carefully placed to ensure flow profiles that are required for accurate flow sensing. Designs shall specifically indicate the location of the sensors and indicate the length of unobstructed duct or pipe upstream and downstream from the sensor. 2. Air-Handling-Unit and Duct Airflow Monitoring: A pitot-tube averaging grid of a material compatible with the environment is to be used. The use of fan inlet grids is preferable where possible to measure fan flow. Fan inlet grids shall be provided by the fan vendor and shall not block or affect fan efficiency. The transducer shall have the following specifications: a. Accuracy: +/- 0.25%. b. Stability: +/- 0.5% of full scale per year or less. c. Auto-zero capability by venting ports to atmosphere. d. Acceptable Manufacturers: Air Monitor, Paragon. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 10 2.3 CONTROL VALVES A. General: 1. Valves shall be applicable for the rated pressure and temperature service. Close off pressures must be determined in concert with the actuators and valves shall be provided to close off against extreme anticipated conditions. Valves shall be selected such that they are not, as a practice, “oversized.” 2. Modulating valves shall be carefully selected to control in a smooth and stable fashion across the range of anticipated conditions. “Split ranging” of heating and cooling valves controlled by the BACS is not acceptable. A separate output from the BACS shall be provided for all control valves. General guidelines are indicated below. When the selection criteria indicated below are not met, flow characteristic analyses shall be submitted to demonstrate reasonable correlation between stroke and flow. Actuator positioning requirements are as follows for each type, if used: a. Electric Input: 4-20 mA or 0- to 10-V dc. b. Pilot positioners shall be required as necessary to keep the valve closed under the maximum differential pressure. B. Coil Valves, Water: 1. Modulating water valves shall generally be ball valves with an equal percentage characteristic. Modulating water valves shall typically be sized for 50%-100% of the typical controlled circuit pressure drop at 70% wide open CV. The minimum design CV shall be no less than 1.9. 2. Water and glycol control valves shall be rated to remain closed (zero leakage) against 120% of the full shutoff head of the pumps, when the control signal is set to "fully closed". 3. Type: Two-way, V-port ball valve with characterizing disk, 1/4 turn. 4. Packing: EPDM O-rings, lubricated. 5. Ball & Stem: Stainless steel. 6. Seat: Fiberglass reinforced Teflon. 7. Actuator: Electric, one motor only; valves 4 inches and larger shall have single operator. 8. Flow Characteristic: Equal percentage. 9. Fail positions shall generally be as follows: a. Terminal hot-water radiation: fail last. 10. Acceptable Manufacturers: a. Belimo b. Valve Solutions 2.4 ACTUATORS A. General: Size actuators and linkages to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve torque or force to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and adequate close off rating as required. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 11 2.5 CERTIFICATION A. Each airflow control device shall be factory calibrated to the job-specific airflows as detailed on the plans and specifications using NIST traceable air stations and instrumentation having a combined accuracy of no more than ±1% of signal over the entire range of measurement. Electronic airflow control devices shall be further calibrated and their accuracy verified to ±5% of signal at a minimum of 48 different airflows across the full operating range of the device. B. Each airflow control device shall be marked with device-specific factory calibration data. At a minimum, it should include the tag number, serial number, model number, eight-point characterization information, and quality control inspection numbers. All information shall be stored by the manufacturer for use with as-built documentation. 2.6 CONTROL PANELS A. Enclosures: 1. All BACS panels shall be metal enclosures containing the controller, I/O modules, power supplies, termination strips, battery (if not integral to the controller or I/O module) and a spare AC outlet. 2. All penetrations of the BACS or outboard gear panels in mechanical rooms shall be from the bottom of the enclosure with wireway and conduit stubs from the wireway up to the panel. 3. All transformers and power supplies shall be mounted outside of the central panel. 4. Enclosures located in mechanical rooms shall be NEMA 4. 5. Enclosures located in labs and other relatively dust free and dry spaces may be NEMA 1. 6. Enclosures shall be mounted on walls or free-standing supports. 7. Provide enclosures with key lockable doors. B. Power Supplies: 1. The Contractor shall provide a regulated, protected power supply as required with the ability to produce at least 33% more current than required by the transmitters and controls being installed. Output regulation shall be less than 0.5mV. There shall be no overshoot on turn on or off. Operating temperature shall be -20 to +70ºC 2. The BACS Contractor shall certify, in writing, at the time of shop drawing submittal that the DDC equipment provided will not cause, as a result of its operation, either directly or indirectly, electrical interference to be induced into the building’s electrical power systems. 3. Class II transformers shall be used. 2.7 CONTROL TUBING A. General: 1. All copper tubing in mechanical equipment rooms shall be hard-drawn, Type L copper or Type FR polyethylene installed in conduit. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 12 2. All tubing installed above accessible lift-out ceilings shall be Type FR, self-extinguishing polyethylene or hard-drawn or soft Type L copper. 3. All control tubing installed in vertical chases shall be hard copper. Drip legs on vertical risers and shutoff valves shall be located in an accessible location where main leaves the riser. 4. All control tubing installed in non-accessible walls or ceilings shall be hard-drawn or soft copper or twin-tube, jacketed polyethylene. 5. All control tubing installed outside shall be jacketed, hard copper for single lines and sheathed polyethylene for multiple lines. All lines outdoors shall be supplied via a desiccant dryer. 6. All tubing in control panels shall be Type FR polyethylene. 7. All control air hangers shall be clamp type and shall not be attached to other trades. 8. All airlines shall be installed in straight lines in harmony with building construction. No control lines shall be run exposed in occupied spaces. All tubing shall be rigidly supported and protected from vibration. All paths through penetrations shall utilize grommets/sleeves. Label all lines at ends and along route. 2.8 CONTROL WIRING A. General: 1. Unless specifically required otherwise by the BACS equipment manufacturer, all I/O wiring shall be twisted shielded cable. For communications, the BACS equipment manufacturer’s installation guidelines and recommendations shall apply. 2. All control wiring in mechanical equipment rooms or other spaces in which it is readily accessible shall be installed in electrical metal tubing (EMT) with compression fittings. 3. All control wiring run in interstitial spaces shall either be run in EMT or a cable tray or raceway. 4. All control wiring installed outdoors or any area subject to moisture shall be installed per code. 5. All control wiring installed in vertical chases shall be installed in EMT. 6. All control wiring above non-accessible ceilings shall be installed in EMT. 7. All control wiring installed above accessible ceiling spaces which are not laboratories or AHUs shall be plenum type, not installed in conduit, but neatly run with generous use of rings or ties. 8. Wire shall be unspliced from the controller to the sensor or device. 9. Control wiring shall not be routed in the same raceway as power wiring. 10. For sensors with twisted shielded pair cable, the shield shall be grounded at the panel and taped back at the sensor. 11. Control wiring shall be color coded and labeled at all points of termination. 12. Remove and properly dispose of all abandoned control wiring, conduit, tubing, boxes, enclosures, components, and other controls-related work. B. Responsibilities: 1. The BACS Contractor shall be responsible for the following: a. All wiring from mechanical and electrical alarms and functions to report these alarms and functions to the BACS head-end. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 13 b. All line and low voltage wiring for the control of all HVAC motors (whether individual or as part of packaged equipment), automatic control valves, and dampers, including: wiring for EPs, PEs, relays, controllers, thermostats, actuating devices, unit heater controls, and cabinet heater controls. c. All power supply wiring for all BACS components. 2. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the following as they relate to the BACS: a. The electrical trade shall provide “lock-out stop” control wiring. b. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of motors which are to be automatically and/or manually controlled by the fire protective alarm system will be run to the motor starters or BACS enclosures by the electrical trade. c. A separate system of wiring for smoke and fire control of dampers that are to be automatically and/or manually controlled directly by the fire protective alarm system (i.e., not in response to motor operation), will be run by the electrical trades except for the power supply wiring to electric damper motors that is specifically excluded from the electrical trade work. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This section defines requirements for configuration and installation of the BACS. B. Devices (i.e., sensors, meters, instruments, etc.) that are resettable must be installed in a readily accessible location (e.g., the device must be accessible at floor level without the use of a ladder). No device shall require shutting down a building system for calibration. C. Devices that are installed in an exposed location (i.e., not mounted within a cabinet) must be suitable for such installations (e.g., do not install a device that is intended to be installed in a cabinet in an exposed location). 3.2 BACS CONFIGURATION A. Vendors providing controls for Cornell University shall maintain site-wide configuration documentation. Whenever the BACS is extended, the documentation required in this section shall be provided/updated per configuration management requirements to reflect the entire installation on the campus. Device naming and addressing must conform to Cornell’s specific conventions as detailed in Cornell Design & Construction Standard 15956. No device will be connected to a Cornell network until these conventions have been understood and met. B. Acceptable Manufacturer: Automated Logic Corporation CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 14 3.3 CONTROL PANELS A. Control panels and enclosures housing the controllers shall be coordinated to the extent possible, to share vertical and horizontal wire-ways to facilitate and minimize the cost of home- runs to terminal equipment. B. Control panels shall be located in equipment rooms, where practicable, and i n locations maintaining ambient conditions between 50 deg F and 90 deg F and 10% to 85% relative humidity. Control panels located in areas where conditions are outside of these ranges shall have enclosures outfitted with heating or cooling devices to provide the proper environmental conditions. Hoffman style enclosures with removable back plates and keyed, hinged covers shall be used. Enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4 when located in mechanical spaces and NEMA 1 when located in occupied spaces. C. Cornell must have quick, direct access to all control panels to maintain building integrity similar to that provided for fire emergencies without going through user spaces. Fiel d panels shall be located outside of user areas where practical. If field panels must be located in user areas, they shall be in areas with easy access. Protection and separation for user activities will be provided. D. Fabrication: 1. The Contractor shall size the panel such that no more than 80% of the surface of the enclosure back plate is used. 2. Plastic wire way (e.g., Panduit) shall be used to organize all wiring in the panel. 3. Sufficient wire way shall be provided in the panel such that it is filled no more than 80% capacity. 4. Panel layout and construction shall be neat and professional. 5. All controllers, wiring, and components in the panels shall be labeled. All labeling shall match the reference numbers on the cabinet drawings that shall be provided for each panel. 6. Label the power source and circuit number for each panel. 3.4 CONTROLLERS A. The controllers provided shall meet the performance requirements for throughput, response time, point capacity, trend log capacity, etc., as stated in this section and Section 23 09 25. The controllers shall also be configured and programmed to carry out the sequences of operation contained in the project documents. While Section 23 09 25 contains several constraints on the controller system architecture, it is recognized that a variety of configurations may be equally acceptable. For example, it may be possible to meet the project requirements with a single large controller or several smaller ones. Therefore, this guideline does not generally prescribe controllers' system architecture or controllers' detailed characteristics, such as processor speed, amount of memory, amount of I/O, power supply details, etc. B. Since these guidelines with respect to controllers are performance oriented, rather than prescriptive, they will generally refer simply to “controllers” meaning computers capable of direct digital control. In those cases where distinguishing between controllers with differing capabilities is needed, the following nomenclature will be used (and is also defined in Section 23 09 25): CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 15 1. Building-level controller: These are controllers that are connected to the ca mpus backbone network and communicate over Ethernet using BACnet/IP. They will typically be used to control and monitor one or more large systems or be applied to ot her building- wide functions. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Building Controller (B-BC). 2. System-level controller. These controllers may, or may not, be directly connected to the campus backbone network. They will typically be dedicated to the control of a single large piece of equipment such as an air handler DOAS unit or a lab environment with fume hoods. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC). 3. Field-level controller. These controllers will be on a lower performance BACnet LAN such as MS/TP or ARCNET. They will typically be used for control of "unitary" devices such as VAV boxes, fan-coil units, etc. They shall, at a minimum, meet the requirements of a BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). C. Controllers shall be provided with a real-time operating system resident in ROM. It shall support all specified functions. It shall provide a command prioritization scheme to allow functional override of control functions. At a minimum, the following shall be provided: 1. Real-time operating system software. 2. Real-time clock/calendar and network time synchronization (with the exception of field - level controllers). 3. Controller diagnostic software. 4. DDC software. 5. Alarm processing and buffering software. 6. Energy management software. 7. Data trending, reporting, and buffering software. 8. I/O (physical and virtual) database. Inputs and outputs shall have the capability to be overridden for emergency modes and testing. If the design documentation does not specifically indicate for which points this is required, control vendor shall request in writing a list of such points. If this has not been requested, the vendor shall reprogram or reconfigure the systems as required during testing. D. Programming: The programming shall be logically segmented, documented, and titled, and expand on the specified sequence of operations. Each segment shall contain control logic for a specific controlled component of a system. This is to improve the ability of the end user to understand and interpret the logic easily. E. Trending: To support commissioning and building data mining, the BACS shall be capable of trending and archiving all points on building- and system-level controllers at a minimum of 15 minute intervals. The BACS shall also have the capability of trending at least five points on each field-level controller at an interval of 15 minutes. The trend data shall be uploaded to a central database as needed to prevent buffer overflow in the controller. Controller memory capability, network architecture, and communications bandwidth shall be designed to account for this trending. The BACS vendor shall provide control trends during start up and prior to functional performance testing of the systems. Reports shall be scheduled to output the data to a common format such as comma separated text, Microsoft formats such as Excel and Access, and portable database format. Trended data may also be archived in an Owner -accessible SQL database. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 16 F. Trend Graphs: Web-based software shall provide for displaying graphic plots of the trended values. The software shall support multiple scales, points and point types simultaneously. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. Provide a trend for every analog control loop that includes the setpoint, process variable, and control output. G. Real-time Plotting: Software shall be provided for real time plotting/graphing of multiple values in user-defined time intervals. These graphs will typically be used in commissioning to observe loop responses and system reactions. The BACS vendor shall configure these graphs in a logical manner for each system. Consult with the commissioning team members and project manager for required configuration. H. Web-based Graphics: A web server is to be supplied to supply access to graphic displays, the following screens shall be provided: 1. Floor Plan Screens: a. Provide floor plan screens for each floor and/or section of the building. Indicate the location of all equipment that is not located on the equipment room screens. Indicate the location of temperature sensors and VAV boxes, chilled beams, etc., associated with each temperature-controlled zone (i.e., VAV terminals, fan-coils, single-zone AHUs, etc.) on the floor plan screens. b. Display the space temperature point adjacent to each temperature sensor symbol. Indicate room numbers as provided by Cornell University. Provide a grap hic link from each zone and/or equipment symbol shown on the graphic floor plan screens to each corresponding equipment schematic graphic screen. c. Provide floor plan screens for each mechanical equipment room and, if mechanical equipment is situated there, the roof. Indicate the location of each item of mechanical equipment. Provide a link from each equipment symbol shown on the plan view screen to each corresponding mechanical system schematic graphic. d. If multiple floor plans are necessary to show all areas, provide a graphic building key plan. Use elevation views and/or plan views as necessary to graphically indicate the location of all of the larger scale floor plans. Link the graphic building key plan to larger scale partial floor plans. Provide links from each larger scale floor plan graphic to the building key plan and to each of the other graphic floor plan screens. e. Provide a graphic site plan with links to and from each building graphic. 2. System Schematic Screens: a. Provide graphics for each air-handling system. Indicate OA temperature and relative humidity, and mode of operation as applicable (i.e., occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, etc.). Link screens for air handlers to the heating system and cooling system graphics. Link screens for supply and exhaust systems, if they are not available in a single graphic. b. Each I/O point in the project shall appear in at least one graphic. System graphics shall include flow diagrams with status, setpoints, current analog input and output values, operator commands, etc., as applicable. General layout of the system shall be schematically correct. I/O devices shall be shown in their schematically correct CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 17 locations. Include appropriate engineering units for each displayed point value. Verbose names (English language descriptors) shall be included for each point on all graphics; this may be accomplished by the use of a pop-up window accessed by selecting the displayed point with the cursor. 1) Indicate all adjustable setpoints on the applicable system schematic graphic or, if space does not allow, on a supplemental linked setpoint screen. All outputs shall be represented in terms of percent open and include a pop-up link to the control logic. c. Provide a system schematic graphic for each HVAC subsystem controlled. d. Provide a graphic for each hydronic system. e. Provide a graphic for each terminal unit. In addition to points associated with the unit, indicate mode of operation as applicable (i.e., normal occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, maximum heating, maximum cooling, etc.). Provide links between the applicable floor plan screen and this screen. Also provide links to the graphics representing the parent systems. f. Link screens for heating and cooling system graphics to utility history reports showing current and monthly energy usage, demands, peak values, etc. g. Link screens to all schedules and setpoints. I. Alarm Programming: Alarms shall be “intelligent” based upon the algorithms in this section. 1. In general, alarm programming related to DDC controlled equipment should reside at the controller level along with the functional programming for equipment control. a. Intrinsic alarming associated with AI, AV, BI or BV objects (or any of the other 23 BACnet objects that support intrinsic alarming) shall only be used where the alarm is valid regardless of the state of the associated equipment or where there is a ready means for automatically suppressing alarm generation when the associated equipment is operationally secured. b. Alarm points shall be separate BACnet objects (e.g., BV or EEO) actuated by associated alarm programming. c. Alarm objects shall have descriptive BACnet object names. BACnet alarm object names shall end in “Alarm”. For detailed information on proper point naming conventions, see Cornell University Facility Services, Design and Construction Standards, 15956 and Section 23 09 25 Building Automation and Control System Communications and Interoperability. d. If it is necessary for the alarm to have latching functionality, the user shall be provided easy unlatching capability from within the DDC system if appropriate, taking into account equipment safety concerns. This is in addition to any local alarm reset. e. Alarms designated for monitoring by EMCS shall be set up in the DDC system to report to the EMCS alarm server. 2. Analog Deviation Alarms: Analog deviation alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and the controlled variable setpoint (whether calculated or fixed). CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 18 a. When controlled variable deviates from setpoint above or below user adjustable high or low alarm thresholds, the alarm shall be activated. b. High and low alarm threshold values shall have associated adjustable deadbands (hysteresis values) for alarm clearing conditions as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm threshold or rises above the low alarm threshold. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays for active equipment operation. d. Alarm programming shall include startup delays to prevent nuisance alarms during equipment startup. e. Analog deviation alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured. 3. Analog High Limit Alarms: Analog high limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable high limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable rises above the user adjustable high limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. High alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable falls below the high alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. High limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 4. Analog Low Limit Alarms: Analog low limit alarms shall be based upon the comparison between the controlled variable and a user adjustable low limit alarm value. a. When controlled variable falls below the user adjustable low limit, the alarm shall be activated. b. Low alarm limit value shall have associated adjustable deadband (hysteresis value) for alarm clearing condition as the controlled variable rises above the low alarm limit. c. Alarm programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. d. Low limit alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 5. Binary Run Status Alarms: Status alarms shall be based upon the comparison between run status and equipment command where applicable. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. 6. Binary Alarming: Alarms shall be triggered upon associated BI changing state to the non- normal or alarm state. a. Alarm Status programming shall include user adjustable alarm delays. b. Binary alarms shall be disabled if the associated equipment is operationally secured, unless needed due to equipment safety considerations. 7. Steam Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger Temperature Alarming: Steam shell and tube heat exchangers shall have two temperature alarms associated with them. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 19 a. Operational Supply Temperature Deviation Alarm when heat exchanger is in operation. b. High Supply Temperature Alarm that is always enabled whether or not the heat exchanger is operational or not, so as to monitor for steam control valve leak by. 3.5 COMMISSIONING A. The BACS shall be fully commissioned. All acceptance testing, documentation, and training shall be required. B. The BACS contractor’s responsibilities for commissioning and check-out include the following: 1. Provide all logic, graphics, and trends for review prior to the start of field commissioning activities. 2. Provide a complete calibration and operational check for each individual point and function contained within the BACS. 3. Conduct the checkout with the use of point/function log sheets to be prepared by the subcontractor. The Owner shall approve the log sheet format. 4. Submit log sheets to the Owner prior to the commencement of any final acceptance testing. 5. Certify, in writing, to the Owner prior to the commencement of final acceptance testing that all components of the BACS system are functioning as per the requirements of the contract documents. 6. Provide to the Owner as-built drawings and documentation at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of any final BACS acceptance testing. 7. The BACS contractor shall issue a report upon project completion stating that the system is complete, has been adjusted, and has had all hardware and software functions verified, that all analog control loops are tuned, and is operating in accordance with the specifications. Any deviations from specified settings or operations necessitated during system adjustment shall be specifically noted. 8. The BACS contractor shall check out the installation with a representative from Cornell. The checkout shall consist of verifying the ability of the BACS to communicate with the central EMCS system, verifying the calibration of each sensor and/or transmitter, and verifying the operation of each control point. 9. All software processes shall be thoroughly demonstrated to Cornell. Alarm conditions shall be simulated for conformance. Analog control points shall be exercised through their entire range. All control interlocks and sequences shall be completely verified. The checkout shall be a thorough and exhaustive review of the installation to assure proper operation of the total system. 3.6 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives of the control manufacturer shall provide instruction to the Owner’s operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical systems and controls installed by the contractor. The amount of training that is provided shall match the size of the project (e.g., no less than eight hours for small projects and up to 80 hours for large projects). CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BUILDING AUTOMATION CONTROL SYSTEM 23 09 23 - 20 B. Contractor shall make available to the Owner regular, scheduled training courses for ongoing training of the Owner’s operating personnel. Programs shall include hardware- and software- oriented courses as well as energy conservation and management courses. C. In addition to the normal training listed above, all vendors will be required to provide two weeks of training at the BACS manufacturer’s training facility for four people. This training only needs to be provided once for a particular set of installed BACS products . If a contractor has provided this training previously (on a previous project or directly with the Owner) then the additional training does not need to be provided again. 3.7 WARRANTY A. Except as otherwise specified, the Contractor shall warrant and guarantee all work against defects in materials, equipment, and workmanship for a period of one year from the date of acceptance of the work as evidenced by a resolution to that effect by the Owner, and for that period of time noted in special or extended warranties. B. The period of one year shall be extended with respect to portions of the work first performed after substantial completion by the period of time between substantial completion and the actual performance of the work. END OF SECTION 23 09 23 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 1 SECTION 23 09 25 - BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 APPLICABLE STANDARDS A. The following standards shall govern the design and selection of equipment supplied to fulfill the requirements of this section: 1. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2004: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control Networks, as amended, and hereinafter referred to as “BACnet,” American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air -Conditioning Engineers, Inc. 2004. 2. B. ATA/ANSI 878.1 (1992), ARCNET Local Area Network. B. ISO/IEC 8802-3 (1993), Information processing systems - Local area networks - Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. In addition to the definitions contained in the applicable standards of 1.03, the following should be noted: 1. ARCNET - Attached Resource Computer Network. See BACnet, Clause 8 and ATA/ANSI 878.1. 2. BACnet/IP - BACnet Annex J Devices. Annex J of BACnet describes how BACnet devices can make use of IP directly for communicating across IP-based internets. 3. BACnet PICS - A Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement that describes the BACnet capabilities of a specific device. See BACnet, Annex A. 4. BACS - Building Automation and Control System. 5. BBMD - BACnet Broadcast Management Device. See BACnet, Annex J. 6. BMA - BACnet Manufacturers Association. 7. BTL - The BACnet Testing Laboratories of the BMA. The organization responsible for testing products to assure that they conform to the BACnet standard. Listings of tested products are available at www.bacnetassociation.org. 8. Campus Backbone - A fiber optic data communication infrastructure on the Cornell campus managed by CIT. Users connect to the backbone by means of CIT -supplied Ethernet concentrators in each building and appropriate 10/100BASE-T unshielded, CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 2 twisted pair wiring. The backbone uses the Internet Protocol (IP) for routing messages to and from computers both on and off the Cornell campus. 9. CIT - Cornell Information Technologies. The organization that manages the Cornell campus networking infrastructure, including the provision of network connections in Cornell buildings. 10. Computer Section - The computer group within the Cornell Utilities and Energy Management Department. The Computer Section is responsible for the EMCS and the coordination of BACS device addressing and network numbering. 11. BIBB - BACnet Interoperability Building Block. A collection of one or more BACnet services defined for the purpose of describing communication functionality in an unambiguous way. See BACnet, Annex K. 12. Device Profile - A collection of BIBBs that describes the minimum BACnet capabilities of a particular device in order to achieve reliable communication in one of five specified “interoperability areas.” Devices include BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) and BACnet Application Specific Controllers (B-ASC). See BACnet, Annex L. 13. EMCS - A computer complex, housed at Chilled Water Plant 1 that provides Energy Management and Control System functions for the University. The EMCS is connected to the campus backbone and uses the IP for the routing of messages to and from individual buildings. 14. Ethernet - A carrier sensing multiple access with collision detection network technology defined by ISO/IEC 8802-3. 15. Gateway - A device that translates BACnet messages into those of a non-BACnet protocol and vice-versa. 16. Internetwork - A set of two or more BACnet networks interconnected by routers. 17. Interoperability Area - A communications domain in which functional cooperation is desired. These areas are currently: 1) data sharing; 2) alarm and event management; 3) trending; 4) scheduling; and 5) device and network management. See BACnet, Clause 22. 18. IP - The Internet Protocol. A networking protocol originally developed by the federal Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency. BACnet messages can traverse the campus backbone by being encapsulated in routable IP packets. 19. Local - Pertaining to the requirements of a specific job or building project. 20. LAN - Local Area Network. One of the approved BACnet network technologies: Ethernet, ARCNET or MS/TP. 21. MS/TP - Master-Slave/Token-Passing Network. One of the approved BACnet LANs. See BACnet, Clause 9. 22. Network - One of the communication technologies for data communications specified in BACnet. Approved network technologies at Cornell are Ethernet, ARCNET and MS/TP. 23. PICS - Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A document that describes in detail a device’s BACnet capabilities. See BACnet, Annex A. 24. UDP - The User Datagram Protocol. One of the IP family of protocols. UDP is used to convey BACnet/IP messages and is characterized by a “port number” for each protocol. BACnet/IP typically uses UDP port X'BAC0' or decimal 47808. 25. VLAN - Virtual Local Area Network. A network configuration that allows devices to communicate across multiple physical local area networks (LANs) using their hardware or “medium access control” (MAC) addresses as if they shared a common networking medium. As with a physical LAN, “local” broadcast messages are also propagated to each of the participating LANs. VLAN capability depends on the configuration of the CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 3 interconnecting data communication equipment. VLAN configuration is performed by CIT. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. In addition to any requirements specified elsewhere, the Contractor shall provide both proposed and as-built versions of the following: 1. Schematic drawings that represent the system architecture and configuration, in both hardcopy and editable electronic format. 2. A points list that includes, for each physical or logical point, the name, description, display units, alarm limits and definitions, along with the BACnet object description, object ID, and associated device ID. The list shall also indicate whether Trend Log or Schedule objects have been established for the point. 3. Documentation for any non-standard BACnet objects, properties, or enumerations utilized detailing their structure, data types, and any associated lists of enumerated values. 4. PICS files indicating the BACnet functionality and configuration of each device. In addition to the requirements of BACnet, Annex A, the Contractor shall provide information on any limitations on the numbers of supported objects in a given device including, specifically, Trend Log and Schedule objects. 5. Documentation on submitted products that have been tested and listed by the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) or a letter on manufacturer’s company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been completed, a written commitment shall be provided to upgrade installed controls to a version that meets BTL testing and listing requirements should deficiencies be found during BTL testing. 1.5 COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall be responsible for all coordination of subcontractors’ work relative to the BACS. Specific questions relating to communication and interoperability shall be submitted to the Computer Section. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 GENERAL A. Each networked device supplied pursuant to this section shall be installed and configured so as to correctly execute all sequences of operation for its intended application, as defined in other sections of this specification. In addition, each networked device shall provide, at a minimum, the BACnet communication capabilities prescribed in the device profiles for devices of its type. See Article 2.2. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 4 2.2 REQUIREMENTS FOR SYSTEM COMPONENTS A. This clause prescribes the minimum requirements for devices supplied pursuant to this section. 1. Controller Requirements: Controller devices supplied to meet the functional and operational requirements of this specification shall conform, at a minimum, to one the BACnet device profiles contained in BACnet, Annex L: BACnet Building Controller (B- BC), BACnet Advanced Application Controller (B-AAC) or BACnet Application Specific Controller (B-ASC). The interoperability requirements of such devices are contained in BACnet, Annex L. B-BC controller devices shall communicate using BACnet/IP. Other devices may use BACnet over ARCNET or BACnet over MS/TP. 2. Router Requirements: In the event that devices are provided that do not use BACnet/IP over Ethernet as their communication technology, BACnet routers shall be provided that route between BACnet/IP over Ethernet and the other BACnet LAN type(s), whether ARCNET or MS/TP. These routers shall conform to the specifications of BACnet, Clause 6. 3. Gateways: BACS devices that use BACnet as their native protocol are preferred. The use of gateways, in circumstances where no native BACnet devices are available, requires the specific approval of the Owner in each instance. 4. Workstation Requirements: The EMCS operator interface is the responsibility of the Computer Section. If, however, a specific job requires a local workstation, the Contractor shall provide a personal computer of current design and approved by the Owner equipped with a Web browser that can display information from a Contractor-supplied Web server that interfaces with the local BACnet network and the campus backbone, as described for below-specified web server requirements. 5. Web Server Requirements: If a local workstation is required, the Contractor shall comply with above-specified workstation requirements and shall, in addition, provide a Web server computer with the Web page presentation, data acquisition and storage functionality described in this section, including the specific functions listed below. The Web server shall be configured in such a way that there is no software-imposed limit to the number of simultaneous users. a. Data Sharing: 1) Presentation of data (i.e., user-definable reports and graphics) 2) The ability to monitor and display the values of all BACnet object types, including all required and optional properties. 3) The ability to modify set points and parameters. b. Alarm and Event Management: 1) Operator notification and presentation of event information 2) Alarm acknowledgment by operators 3) Alarm summarization 4) Adjustment of alarm limits 5) Adjustment of alarm routing CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 5 c. Scheduling: 1) Modification of schedules 2) Display of the start and stop times (schedule) of scheduled devices. d. Trending: 1) Modification of the parameters of a trend log 2) Display and archive of trend log data e. Device and Network Management: 1) Display of information about the status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. 2) Display of information about any object on the BACnet internetwork. 3) Ability to silence a device on the network that is transmitting erroneous data. 4) Ability to cause a remote device to reinitialize itself. 5) Ability to backup and restore the configuration of devices on the local BACnet network. 6) Ability to query and change the configuration of local BACnet routers. 2.3 REQUIREMENTS FOR NETWORK CONNECTIONS A. This clause prescribes the means of interconnecting BACS devices provided pursuant to this specification. 1. Local Area Networks (LANs) a. All control devices meeting the B-BC device profile shall be connected to an ISO 8802-3 (Ethernet) LAN provided by the Contractor. This LAN, in turn, shall be connected to the campus backbone network. Unless otherwise specified, the connection shall be via a 10/100BASE-T port provided by the Owner. The location of the jack will be determined in consultation with the Computer Section, which will arrange with CIT for the jack's installation. The Contractor shall also provide any additional data communication hardware, such as hubs and repeaters, which may be needed to interconnect the supplied BACS equipment and to connect to the Owner's backbone network. b. To facilitate maintenance technician access to the LAN, the Contractor shall also provide at least one additional 10/100BASE-T access point in each mechanical room that contains BACS equipment. This requirement may be met by supplying either a hub with a spare port or a dedicated jack. c. Control devices that meet the B-ASC profile, but do not support Ethernet, must use another approved BACnet LAN technology. These technologies are ARCNET and MS/TP. If Ethernet is not supported on any part of the internet-work, a standalone BACnet router, or a BACnet Building Controller with built -in routing capability, must be provided for routing between the Ethernet and ARCNET or MS/TP LANs. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. This clause provides specific interoperability and networking requirements that pertain to the use of BACnet. 3.2 REQUIREMENTS BY INTEROPERABILITY AREA A. This clause provides requirements pertaining to the five interoperability areas of data sharing, alarm and event management, trending, scheduling, and device and network management. 1. Data Sharing: Data Sharing requirements apply to the exchange of information between BACnet devices for archival storage, generating graphics and reports, the sharing of common sensor or calculated values, carrying out interlocked control strategies, and the modification of set points or other operational parameters. All such data to be exchanged shall be represented as BACnet objects and conveyed using BACnet messages. Only standard BACnet objects and messages may be used to implement data sharing requirements unless the non-standard extensions are explicitly approved by the Owner. Any extensions to BACnet shall be fully documented in the manner used within the BACnet standard. Submission of such documentation is a prerequisite for obtaining approval of an extension. a. Points List: The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with all points indicated in the BACS points list. The Contractor shall provide any additional points needed to fully implement the sequence of operations and other functionality described in this specification. b. Data Presentation: In the event that workstation/web server capabilities have been specified, the following characteristics shall apply to graphic displays: 1) The graphic displays shall include schematic diagrams of the systems being displayed. 2) When a graphic display is being viewed all values displayed shall be updated when a change of value (COV) notification is received or, if COV is not implemented, within five seconds. 3) Any data value from any networked device shall be available for plotting at a workstation in real time. The operator shall be able to select binary and analog data concurrently and to plot multiple instances of each data type on the same screen. The operator shall be able to select sampling intervals from 1 second to 60 seconds. For devices that implement COV reporting, the operator shall be able to select this as the means to update the plot. It shall be possible to save such real-time plots for subsequent recall. c. Monitoring of Any Property: The operator shall be able to display any value of any property of any object from any networked device including all properties required by BACnet, all supported optional properties, and any proprietary extensions. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 7 d. Global Object Definitions: The control system shall be configured with system- wide unique BACnet objects as needed to convey all globally significant information necessary to implement the control strategy. e. Set-Point and Parameter Modifications: Operators with appropriate authority shall be able to modify all control loop set points and tuning parameters via BACnet messages initiated through operator interaction with graphics displays. f. Peer-to-Peer Data Dependencies: All BACnet devices shall be installed and configured to exchange data values directly, without the need for operator or workstation intervention, to implement the sequence of operations specified in the mechanical system drawings and to share global data values. 2. Alarm and Event Management: a. Alarm and Event Management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the occurrence of predefined conditions that meet specific criteria. Such conditions are called “events” and may be the basis for the initiation of a particular control action in response or the simple logging of the event’s occurrence. The event may also be deemed to represent a condition that constitutes an “alarm” requiring human acknowledgment and intervention. b. All alarms and events shall be implemented using standard BACnet event detection and notification mechanisms. Either intrinsic reporting or algorithmic change reporting may be used but the intrinsic reporting method is preferred. See BACnet, Clause 13. c. Alarm Lists: 1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured to detect alarms and events for the points indicated in the system drawings. Software logic shall be provided to avoid nuisance alarms, e.g., no temperature or status alarms shall be generated when fan systems are not running or during start-up and shut-down transitions. It shall be possible to configure a delay between the occurrence of an alarm condition and its enunciation. 2) Alarms shall appear at the EMCS and any local operator workstation(s) within five seconds of their occurrence. The workstations shall display an alarm message window that appears on top of any other open windows. The alarm message window shall have a distinctive color and appearance to attract the operator's attention. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to configure the workstation to emit an audible signal (or not) when an alarm message is received. 3) Alarms that require operator acknowledgement shall cause the alarm window to remain active until such an acknowledgement is received. If multiple alarms are received, unacknowledged alarms shall be displayed on a first come first served basis grouped by priority, with the highest priority alarms displayed first. 4) Alarms shall be distributed using the BACnet notification cl ass mechanism. Assignment of classes and destinations shall be configured according to details provided by the Owner. One destination shall, in all cases, be the EMCS. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 8 5) BACnet provides a mechanism for prioritizing alarm and event notification messages using a numerical range of 0-255 with 0 being the highest priority and 255 being the lowest priority. The priorities presented in the Table 1 are consistent with the safety requirements of UL 864 (applies to fire systems) and UL 1076 (applies to security systems). 6) Alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured in the Priority Range as indicated in Table 1 below, and shall be conveyed using the indicated Network Priority. See BACnet, Clause 6. Table 1. Cornell Alarm and Event Priorities Message Group Priority Range Network Priority Brief Description Life Safety 00 - 31 Life Safety Message Notifications related to an immediate threat to life, safety or health such as fire detection or armed robbery. Property Safety 32 - 63 Life Safety Message Notifications related as an immediate threat to property such as forced entry. Supervisory 64 - 95 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to improper operation, monitoring failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety monitoring), or monetary loss. Trouble 96 - 127 Critical Equipment Message Notifications related to communication failure (particularly of Life Safety or Property Safety equipment). Miscellaneous Higher Priority Alarm and Events 128 - 191 Urgent Message Higher-level notifications related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. Miscellaneous Lower Priority Alarm and Events 192 - 255 Normal Message Lower-level notification related to occupant discomfort, normal operation, normal monitoring, or return to normal. d. Alarm Acknowledgement: Alarms shall be acknowledged through the EMCS alarm acknowledgement process. e. Alarm Summarization: Alarm summarization shall be handled through the EMCS alarm summarization process. f. Alarm Parameter Adjustment: Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm parameters for all standard BACnet event types. g. Alarm Routing Adjustment: 1) Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to change alarm routing (BACnet notification classes) for each alarm including the destination for each type of alarm and alarm priority, the day of week and time of day, and the type of transition involved (TO-OFFNORMAL, TO-NORMAL, etc.). 2) Initially, notification classes shall be configured in a manner that distinguishes between the EMCS and any local workstation, if provided. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 9 3. Scheduling: Scheduling is the exchange of data between BACnet devices related to the establishment and maintenance of dates and time at which specified output actions are to be taken. All schedules shall be implemented using BACnet objects and messages. a. Schedule Lists: 1) The Contractor shall provide devices installed and configured with start/stop, mode change, and night setback schedules as defined in the sequence of operations. As part of the installation process, the Contractor shall configure vacation, holiday, and any special event schedules as provided by the Owner. 2) The system shall have the ability to program alterations to programmed operating schedules based on the priority of events and shall include the following scenario: a) Based on operator privileges, the operator shall have the ability to temporarily override the programmed schedule of equipment. Operational override of a programmed schedule shall be for a specific duration following which the schedule shall revert back to the preprogrammed schedule. b. Display of Start and Stop Times and Actions: An operator shall be able to inspect the content of any schedule and determine the specific control actions that will occur at any time, on any date. For any particular device or system parameter that is the subject of a schedule, an operator shall be able to determine the schedule of actions related to that particular device or parameter. c. Modification of Schedules: All calendar entries and schedules shall be modifiable from the EMCS or local workstation by an operator with sufficient privilege. 4. Trending: Trending is the accumulation of (time, value) data pairs at specified rates for a specified duration. Trends are distinguished from real-time plotting of data by the fact that the data are destined for long-term storage. a. Archival Storage of Data: Archival storage of data will be handled by the EMCS. However, the Owner may specify local trend archiving and display through the use of BACnet Trend Log objects. b. Modification of Trend Log Parameters: An operator with sufficient privilege shall be able to change the data points to be logged, the sampling rate, and the duration of a trend log. 5. Device and Network Management: Device and network management is the exchange of data between BACnet devices concerning the operation and status of specific devices. If local workstation capabilities are provided, the following functions shall be available: a. Display of Device Status Information: Operators shall be able to display at any time the operational status of any device on the BACnet internetwork. b. Display of BACnet Object Information: Operators shall be able to display, at any time, any property of any BACnet object. Operators shall be able to display CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 10 property values of objects grouped by object type, object location, and b uilding system. c. Silencing Devices that are Transmitting Erroneous Data: Operators shall be able to direct a field device to stop transmitting event, alarm or COV notifications until a subsequent command to resume transmissions is received. d. Time Synchronization: Operators shall be able to set the time and date in any device on the network that supports time-of-day functionality. The operator shall be able to select to set the time and date for an individual device, or all devices on a single local network. e. Remote Device Reinitialization: Operators shall have the ability to issue reinitialization commands to any device that supports remote reinitialization. f. Backup and Restore: Operators shall have the ability to backup and restore all BACnet devices on the network that support this capability. g. Configuration Management of Half-Routers, Routers and BBMDs: Operators shall have the ability to display and modify the routing table entries in all supplied BACnet half-routers and routers and the broadcast distribution and foreign device registration tables in all BBMDs. 3.3 USE OF BACNET OBJECTS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the representation of data and functionality using BACnet objects. 1. Naming Conventions: The following sections list the requirements for the assignment of names and identifiers for BACnet objects: a. Device Names: 1) The EMCS uses a system for naming its control devices based on facility name, location within a facility, the system or systems that the device monitors and/or controls, or the area served. Names can be up to 254 characters in length, without embedded spaces. Only the characters A-Z, 0- 9, ".", and "-" may be used. The goal is the shortest descriptive, but unambiguous, name. For example, if there is only one chilled water pump "P1", a valid name would be "DUFFIELD.CW.P1.CONTROL". 2) If there are two pumps designated "P1", one in the basement mechanical room and one in the penthouse mechanical room, the names could be "CHP.BSMT.CW.P1.CONTROL" or "CHP.PENT.CW.P1.CONTROL". In the case of unitary controllers, for example a VAV box controller, a name might be "COURT.122.TV-LOUNGE". These names should be used for the value of the "Object_Name" property of the BACnet Device objects of the controllers involved so that the BACnet name and the EMCS name are the same. b. Device Instance Numbers: CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 11 1) BACnet allows 4194305 device instances per BACnet internetwork, each of which must be unique. Cornell's unique device instances are formed as follows: Device Instance = "FFFFNDD" where: a) FFFF = Facility Code (see below) b) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. c) DD = 00-99 This allows up to 100 devices per network. 2) Facility Code assignments are currently: a) 0000-0999 Open b) 1000-1999 Statutory Facilities c) 2000-2999 Endowed Facilities d) 3000-3999 Housing and Dining Facilities e) 4000-4999 Off-Campus Facilities f) 5000-5999 Utilities 3) Some facilities have a facility code with an alphabetic suffix to denote wings, related structures, etc. The suffix will be ignored. Network numbers for facility codes above 4193 will be assigned in the range 0000-0999. 4) The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Facility Code to be used prior to beginning device configuration. c. Non-Device Object Names: Objects other than Device objects shall be named in a manner analogous to Device objects. The names shall consist of a facility.[sub- facility.]system.[sub-system.]point designation. d. Non-Device Object Instance Numbers: The instance numbers for objects other than Device objects may be assigned at the Contractor’s discretion subject only to the constraint that they be unique for a given object type within a given device. 2. Commissioning/Diagnostic Mode: In order to support commissioning and troubleshooting functions, the Out_Of_Service property of all Analog, Binary, Multi- state, Loop, and Program objects shall be writable using BACnet services. 3. Using Object Descriptions: a. Each device object and every object in BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) shall be configured with a Description property. The descriptions used shall be submitted to the Owner for approval. b. For all object types in all devices that support Description properties, the available string length and whether or not the Description is writable using BACnet services shall be specified in the device’s PICS. 4. Issues Relating to Specific BACnet Object Types: This clause provides requirements that pertain to the use of specific BACnet object types. a. Analog Input, Output, and Value: All Analog_Input, Analog_Output, and Analog_Value objects shall have the capability of using the change of value CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 12 (COV) reporting mechanism and the COV_Increment property shall be writable using BACnet services. b. Binary Input: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Input objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Input objects shall support COV reporting. c. Binary Output: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Output objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. All Binary Output objects associated with motor on/off status shall track changes of state and runtime. Binary Output objects shall support COV reporting. d. Binary Value: The Inactive_Text and Active_Text properties of Binary Value objects shall be configured with text string values as indicated on the points list. Binary Value objects shall support COV reporting. e. Calendar: 1) Devices providing scheduling capability shall also provide at least one Calendar object with a capacity of at least ten entries. Operators shall be able to view the calendar object and make modifications from any BACnet workstation on the network. 2) If the Calendar’s Date_List property is writable using BACnet services, all calendar entry data types shall be supported. f. Loop: All control loops using any combination of proportional, integral, and/or derivative control shall be represented by BACnet Loop objects. Operators with sufficient authority shall be able to adjust at least the Update_Interval, Setpoint, Proportional_Constant, Integral_Constant, and Derivative_Constant using BACnet services. Loop objects shall support COV reporting. g. Multi-state Input, Output, and Value: The text to be used for the Multi-state object types shall be determined from the points list. Feedback_Value shall be determined by sensing the actual condition or mode of the device. All Multi-state objects shall support COV reporting. h. Schedule: All building systems with date and time scheduling requirements shall have schedules represented by BACnet Schedule objects. All operators shall be able to view the entries for a schedule. Operators with sufficient privilege shall be able to modify schedule entries from any BACnet workstation. Required schedules are shown on the drawings as part of the occupied and unoccupied modes. 5. Dynamic Object Creation: BACnet Building Controllers shall be configured to allow the dynamic creation of Trend Log, Calendar, and Schedule objects by means of the BACnet CreateObject service. This shall be possible from any supplied BACnet workstation by operators with appropriate authority. 3.4 USE OF BACNET SERVICES A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet communication services. 1. Interoperable Commands : All dampers, valves, fans, or other mechanical equipment that may need to be controlled by more than one application shall be represented as CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 13 commandable BACnet objects. The application programs interacting with this equipment shall be configured to use the command priorities listed in Table 2. If implementing the sequence of operations or other required functionality requires using a command priority not listed in Table 2, the priority assignment must be approved by the Owner. Table 2. Cornell Command Priorities Priority Level Application Priority Level Application 1 Manual-Life Safety 9 Available 2 Automatic-Life Safety 10 Available 3 Available 11 Load Shedding 4 Available 12 Available 5 Critical Equipment Control 13 Available 6 Minimum On/Off 14 Available 7 Available 15 Available 8 Manual Operator 16 Available 2. Alarming: This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet for alarm processing. a. Alarm Priorities: All alarm and event notification priorities shall be configured as indicated in 3.02.B.1. b. Notification Classes: 1) The EMCS shall be designated as a recipient for all alarm notifications. 2) The Priority, Ack_Required, and Recipient_List properties of Notification Class objects shall be writable over the network using BACnet services. c. Event Notification Message Texts: Alarm and event processing shall be configured to convey descriptive text messages along with the notification. 3. Operator Authority Levels: If local workstation capability is provided, there shall be at least three levels of authority: a. Administrator - All privileges b. Control Shop - All programming and configuration c. Building Coordinator - Read only 4. Change of Value Processing: a. All local workstations shall be able to display property values based on the receipt of confirmed and unconfirmed Change of Value notifications. Operators shall have the ability from any workstation to subscribe to COV notifications for all objects that support COV subscriptions. b. After initialization, all graphic display screens shall update the displayed values using COV notifications if COV notification capabilities are available from the data source. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 BUILDING AUTOMATION AND CONTROL SYSTEM 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS AND INTEROPERABILITY 23 09 25 - 14 c. The COV increment shall be adjustable by an operator using BACnet services. 3.5 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the integr ation of multiple BACnet networks, possibly on different LAN types, into a single BACnet internetwork. 1. Network Numbering: a. Cornell BACnet network numbers are based on a "facility code, network" concept. The "facility code" is the Cornell-assigned numeric value assigned to a specific facility or building. See 3.03.A.2 above. The "network" typically corresponds to a "floor" or other logical configuration within the building. BACnet allows 65535 network numbers per BACnet internetwork. b. Cornell’s network numbers are thus formed as follows: Network Number = "FFFFN" where: 1) FFFF = Facility Code 2) N = 0-9 This allows up to 10 networks per facility or building. 3) N = 0 will generally be assigned to a facility’s BACnet Ethernet LAN. Normally, this network is connected to the campus backbone. The additional N-numbers will be assigned to any ARCNET or MS/TP networks as required. c. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment, or confirmation, of the Network Number(s) to be used prior to beginning device configuration. 2. IP Address Assignments: a. Cornell maintains specially configured VLANs for the purpose of securely transporting BACS communication traffic. Address assignments are coordinated by the Computer Section. b. The Contractor shall contact the Computer Section for assignment of IP addresses (and possibly non-standard UDP ports) prior to beginning device configuration. 3.6 BACNET ROUTERS A. This clause provides requirements that are specific to the use of BACnet routers. 1. Error Message Destination: The Contractor shall configure each BACnet router to transmit network layer (routing) error messages to the EMCS. END OF SECTION 23 09 25 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 1 SECTION 23 31 13 - METAL DUCTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings. 2. Single-wall round ducts and fittings. 3. Sheet metal materials. 4. Duct liner. 5. Sealants and gaskets. 6. Hangers and supports. 7. Leakage testing. 8. Double-wall lined ductwork. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and balancing requirements for metal ducts. 2. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, sound-control devices, duct- mounting access doors and panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." B. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE 62.1. C. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed to SMACNA Seal Class "A." CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 2 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of the following products: 1. Liners and adhesives. 2. Sealants and gaskets. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Fabrication, assembly, and installation, including plans, elevations, sections, components, and attachments to other work. 2. Factory- and shop-fabricated ducts and fittings. 3. Duct layout indicating sizes, configuration, liner material, and static-pressure classes. 4. Elevation of top of ducts. 5. Dimensions of main duct runs from building grid lines. 6. Fittings. 7. Reinforcement and spacing. 8. Seam and joint construction. 9. Penetrations through fire-rated and other partitions. 10. Equipment installation based on equipment being used on Project. 11. Locations for duct accessories, including dampers, turning vanes, and access doors and panels. 12. Hangers and supports, including methods for duct and building attachment and vibration isolation. 13. Provide 1/4-inch-scale coordinated Shop Drawings for mechanical equipment rooms and all supply-, return-, and exhaust-air systems. 1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved: 1. Duct installation in all spaces, indicating coordination with general construction, building components, and other building services. Indicate proposed changes to duct layout. 2. Suspended ceiling components. 3. Structural members to which duct will be attached. 4. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical tile. 5. Penetrations of smoke barriers and fire-rated construction. 6. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following: a. Lighting fixtures. b. Air outlets and inlets. c. Speakers. d. Sprinklers. e. Access panels. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 3 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-up." C. ASHRAE/IESNA Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1, Section 6.4.4 - "HVAC System Construction and Insulation." PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.2 DOUBLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. Rectangular Ducts: Fabricate ducts with indicated dimensions for the inner duct. B. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 4 Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." E. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." 1. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 2. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from oute r duct without compressing insulation. 3. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. 4. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. F. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch-diameter perforations, with overall open area of 23 percent. G. Formed-on Transverse Joints (Flanges): Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Traverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." H. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.3 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCTS AND FITTINGS A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 1. Manufacturers: a. Lindab Inc. b. McGill AirFlow LLC. c. SEMCO Incorporated. d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. e. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 5 B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1. Traverse joints shall be made with couplings and two-part tape sealing system. 2. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 2.4 SHEET METAL MATERIALS A. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. B. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90. 2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized. C. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts. D. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 316, as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article. E. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized. 1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials. F. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 6 2.5 DUCT LINER A. Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard." Duct dimensions shown on Drawings are inside dimensions. 1. Manufacturers: a. CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group. b. Johns Manville. c. Knauf Insulation. d. Owens Corning. 2. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: a. Type II, Rigid: 0.23 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature. 3. Antimicrobial Erosion-Resistant Coating: Apply to the surface of the liner that will form the interior surface of the duct to act as a moisture repellent and erosion -resistant coating. Antimicrobial compound shall be tested for efficacy by an NRTL and registered by the EPA for use in HVAC systems. 4. Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and with ASTM C 916. a. For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Insulation Pins and Washers: 1. Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, 0.106-inch-diameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer. 2. Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick galvanized steel; with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter. C. Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation." 1. Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers of duct liner is prohibited. 2. Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal nosing. 3. Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive. 4. Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure butted- edge overlapping. 5. Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts, unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 7 6. Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm. 7. Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not exceeding 18 inches longitudinally. 8. Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge facings at the following locations: a. Fan discharges. b. Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct. c. Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than 2500 fpm or where indicated. 9. Terminate inner ducts with buildouts attached to fire-damper sleeves, dampers, turning vane assemblies, or other devices. Fabricated buildouts (metal hat sections) or other buildout means are optional; when used, secure buildouts to duct walls with bolts, screws, rivets, or welds. 2.6 SEALANT AND GASKETS A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets shall be a maximum flame -spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke -developed index of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL. B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System: 1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal. 2. Tape Width: 4 inches. 3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. 6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 7. Service: Indoor and outdoor. 8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum. 10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant: 1. Application Method: Brush on. 2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent. 3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20. 4. Water resistant. 5. Mold and mildew resistant. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 8 6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water). 7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative. 8. Service: Indoor or outdoor. 9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or aluminum sheets. D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920. 1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric. 2. Type: S. 3. Grade: NS. 4. Class: 25. 5. Use: O. 6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer. 2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct." C. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: 1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates. 2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 9 Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings. B. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless otherwise indicated. C. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths, with sheet-metal couplings. D. Install ducts with fewest possible joints. E. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch connections. F. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to building lines. G. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness. H. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures. I. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions, install fire dampers. Comply with requirements in Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers. J. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. After fabrication and prior to installation, seal ends of ductwork with shrink-wrap. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appe ndix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines." 3.2 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged. B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the welds to remove discoloration caused by welding. D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets. E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 10 3.3 DUCT SEALING A. All ductwork and plenums shall be constructed to SMACNA "Seal Class A." All transverse joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations shall be sealed to Class A regardless of specified pressure class. 3.4 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs less than 4 inches thick. 5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints. C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection. D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. E. Fire Dampers, Smoke Dampers, and Fire/Smoke Dampers: Duct connections shall be sealed. F. Terminal Units: Longitudinal seams of casings, inlet face of casings, and inlet collars shall be sealed with mastic. G. Coils: Seal all seams and casing penetrations for piping connections. H. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet. I. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.5 CONNECTIONS A. Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories." CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 11 B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections. 3.6 PAINTING A. Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Leakage Tests: 1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test. 2. Test the following systems: a. All ductwork within duct enclosures above the roof, regardless of duct classification. Complete testing, and submit report prior to installation of the roof of the enclosure. b. Ducts with a Pressure Class Lower than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed duct area. c. Ducts with a Pressure Class of 3-Inch wg or Higher: Test all ductwork. 3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. a. Systems Designed to Operate at 3-Inch w.c. and Below: 25 percent of the duct system shall be tested. The consultant/Owner shall randomly choose the sections of ductwork to be tested during the construction phase. If any of the original sections fail the leakage test, another 25 percent of the duct shall be chosen to be tested. If any section of the second 25 percent fails, the entire system shall be leak- tested. b. Systems Designed to Operate in Excess of 3-Inch w.c.: The entire system shall be leak-tested. c. Testing shall be performed in accordance with the SMACNA's "Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." d. Leakage testing shall be witnessed by representative from Cornell University and the Project Engineer of record. 4. Test for leaks before applying external insulation. 5. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximu m design pressure of system or section being tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 6. Give seven days' advance notice for testing. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 12 7. Acceptable criteria for duct leakage tests: a. Interior Supply, Return, and General Exhaust Systems: 5 percent leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. b. Interior Laboratory Exhaust Systems: 2 percent system leakage, tested at 1.25 times the expected operating static pressure. c. For systems not covered above, consult Chapter 19 of the "2012 ASHRAE HVAC System and Equipment Handbook of Recommendation," with final approval by Facilities Engineer. C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests: 1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present. 2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to "Vacuum Test" in NADCA ACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems." a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall not exceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm. D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.8 DUCT CLEANING A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing. B. Use service openings for entry and inspection. 1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated duct. Patch insulation as recommended by manufacturer. Comply with Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for access panels and doors. 2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection. 3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process. C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control: 1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles. 2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into building. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 13 D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits: 1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers). 2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies. 3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter sections, and condensate collectors and drains. 4. Coils and related components. 5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical equipment rooms. 6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems. E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology: 1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from within duct systems and remove contaminants from building. 2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure. 3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories. 4. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins. 5. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures. 3.9 START UP A. Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 93 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC." 3.10 DUCT SCHEDULE A. Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel. B. Supply, Return, and Exhaust Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Downstream of Terminal Units and Air Valves: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative under 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 14 2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive above 3-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. 3. Ducts Connected to Equipment Not Listed Above: a. Pressure Class: Positive or Negative Under 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. C. Outdoor-Air Intake Ducts: 1. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units: a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg. b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A. c. Bottom of intake plenums to be soldered watertight. Provide 1-1/4-inch drain connection at low point. D. Liner: 1. Return-Grille Sand Traps: Fibrous glass, Type 1, 1-1/2 inches thick. E. Double-Wall Duct Interstitial Insulation: 1. Supply-Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick. 2. Return-Air Ducts: 1-1/2 inches thick. F. Elbow Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows." a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio. b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes. c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." 2. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows." a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3- 1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments. 1) Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90-degree elbow. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs METAL DUCTS 23 31 13 - 15 2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90-degree elbow. 3) Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90-degree elbow. b. Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated. c. Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam. G. Branch Configuration: 1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standar ds - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection." a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry. b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in. 2. Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct. a. Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap. b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap. c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral. END OF SECTION 23 31 13 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 1 SECTION 23 33 00 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Manual volume dampers. 2. Flange connectors. 3. Turning vanes. 4. Duct-mounted access doors. 5. Flexible connectors. 6. Flexible ducts. 7. Duct accessory hardware. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Access Doors: The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage tests performed in accordance with AMCA Standard 500-D. C. Shop Drawings: For duct accessories. Include plans, elevations, sections, details and attachments to other work. 1. Detail duct accessories fabrication and installation in ducts and other construction. Include dimensions, weights, loads, and required clearances; and method of field assembly into duct systems and other construction. Include the following: a. Special fittings. b. Manual volume damper installations. c. Control-damper installations. d. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which ceiling-mounted access panels and access doors required for access to duct acc essories are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from Installers of the items involved. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 2 1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For air duct accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ASSEMBLY DESCRIPTION A. Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems." B. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M. 1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G60. 2. Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized. B. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304, and having a No. 2 finish for concealed ducts and polished stainless-steel finish for exposed ducts. C. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts; compatible materials for aluminum and stainless-steel ducts. D. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.3 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS A. Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers: 1. Manufacturers: a. Air Balance Inc.; a division of Mestek, Inc. b. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. c. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. d. McGill AirFlow LLC. e. Nailor Industries Inc. f. Ruskin Company. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 3 g. Trox USA Inc. h. Vent Products Company, Inc. 2. Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream. 3. Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications. 4. Frames: a. Frame: Hat-shaped, 0.094-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.05-inch-thick stainless steel to match system requirements. b. Mitered and welded corners. c. Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts. 5. Blades: a. Multiple or single blade. b. Parallel- or opposed-blade design. c. Stiffen damper blades for stability. d. Galvanized- or stainless-steel to match system material, 0.064 inch thick. 6. Blade Axles: Galvanized steel, stainless steel, or nonferrous metal to match system material 7. Bearings: a. Oil-impregnated bronze or oil-impregnated stainless-steel sleeve to match system material. b. Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft. 8. Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel. 2.4 FLANGE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Nexus PDQ; Division of Shilco Holdings Inc. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Description: Add-on or roll-formed, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange connectors, gaskets, and components. C. Material: Galvanized steel. D. Gage and Shape: Match connecting ductwork. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 4 2.5 TURNING VANES A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. METALAIRE, Inc. 5. SEMCO Incorporated. 6. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. 1. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fibrous-glass fill. C. Manufactured Turning Vanes for Nonmetal Ducts: Fabricate curved blades of resin-bonded fiberglass with acrylic polymer coating; support with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting. D. General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows." E. Vane Construction: Double wall. 2.6 DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS A. Manufacturers: 1. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek, Inc. 2. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 5. Greenheck Fan Corporation. 6. McGill AirFlow LLC. 7. Nailor Industries Inc. 8. Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct." 1. Door: a. Double wall, rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 5 c. Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches. d. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 2. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 3. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. b. Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges and two sash locks. c. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger than 24 by 48 Inches: Continuous and two compression latches with outside and inside handles. 2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Ductmate Industries, Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Inc. 3. Elgen Manufacturing. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc. B. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics. C. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1. D. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 5-3/4 inches wide attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch- wide, 0.028-inch- thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032-inch- thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. E. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F. F. High-Corrosive-Environment System, Flexible Connectors: Glass fabric with chemical- resistant coating. 1. Minimum Weight: 14 oz./sq. yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 450 lbf/inch in the warp and 340 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 67 to plus 500 deg F. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 6 2.8 FLEXIBLE DUCTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. 2. McGill AirFlow LLC. 3. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc. B. Non-Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. C. Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, 2-ply vinyl film supported by helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film. 1. Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative. 2. Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm. 3. Temperature Range: Minus 10 to plus 160 deg F. 4. Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1. D. Flexible Duct Connectors: 1. Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size. 2.9 DUCT ACCESSORY HARDWARE A. Instrument Test Holes: Cast iron or cast aluminum to suit duct material, including screw cap and gasket. Size to allow insertion of pitot tube and other testing instruments and of length to suit duct-insulation thickness. B. Adhesives: High strength, quick setting, neoprene based, waterproof, and resistant to gasoline and grease. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts. B. Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized -steel accessories in galvanized-steel and stainless-steel accessories in stainless-steel ducts. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 7 C. Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel. 1. Install steel volume dampers in steel ducts. D. Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing. E. Install test holes at fan inlets and outlets and elsewhere as indicated. F. Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining accessories and equipment at the following locations: 1. Downstream from control dampers and equipment. 2. Adjacent to and close enough to fire or smoke dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links. Access doors for access to fire or smoke dampers having fusible links shall be pressure relief access doors and shall be outward operation for access doors installed upstream from dampers and inward operation for access doors installed downstream from dampers. 3. Control devices requiring inspection. 4. Elsewhere as indicated. G. Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure. H. Access Door Sizes: 1. One-Hand or Inspection Access: 8 by 5 inches. 2. Two-Hand Access: 12 by 6 inches. 3. Head and Hand Access: 18 by 10 inches. 4. Head and Shoulders Access: 21 by 14 inches. 5. Body Access: 25 by 14 inches. 6. Body plus Ladder Access: 25 by 17 inches. I. Label access doors according to Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door. J. Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment. K. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions. L. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to ducts with maximum 60-inch lengths of flexible duct clamped in place. M. Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands. N. Install duct test holes where required for testing and balancing purposes. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 33 00 - 8 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Tests and Inspections: 1. Operate dampers to verify full range of movement. 2. Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be performed. 3. Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation. END OF SECTION 23 33 00 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 1 SECTION 23 36 00 - AIR TERMINAL UNITS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Variable-volume air terminal units. 1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including sound power data. B. The manufacturer shall submit documentation of leakage test reports performed in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 130. C. Shop Drawings: For air terminal units. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. D. Field quality-control reports. E. Operation and maintenance data. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. B. ASHRAE Compliance: Applicable requirements in ASHRAE 62.1, Section 5 - "Systems and Equipment" and Section 7 - "Construction and System Start-Up." CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 VARIABLE-VOLUME AIR TERMINAL UNITS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carrier. 2. Trane. 3. Price. B. Leakage shall not exceed 4.5 cfm when test against a 1.0-inch w.c. pressure differential. C. Completely factory-assembled unit shall consist of an insulated plenum with air-inlet collar, air- volume damper, flow sensor, and removable access panel. D. Unit casing shall be constructed of double-wall galvanized steel with 1/2-inch-thick, 2.0-pcf (minimum), dual-density, thermal/acoustic glass-fiber insulation between walls. Insulation material not to exceed NFPA 90A smoke- and flame-spread-rating recommendations and to meet UL 181 anti-erosion requirements. Double-wall construction shall have 26-gauge galvanized steel liner on the air-side surface of the insulation for complete metal encapsulation. E. Air-volume dampers shall be factory-calibrated damper mechanism. Provide without mechanical stops. F. Air-volume controls shall be electric by means of an externally mounted 24-V actuator, positioning the damper. Damper shall be normally closed. G. Unit controllers and damper actuators are to be furnished by BACs subcontractor for installation by unit manufacturer. H. Air-volume limits shall be field adjustable to allow for future changes in unit airflow rates. Air- volume limits will be based on the minimum pressure drop rating for the damper unit. For damper with reset units, the minimum and maximum limits will be set at the reset device. I. Each unit to be clearly marked with identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include model number, cfm, coil type, etc. J. Hot-water heating coils shall be factory-mounted to unit in galvanized casing. Aluminum fins shall be bonded to copper tubes. Coil to be leak-tested at 250-psi hydrostatic pressure. K. Box sound power levels shall be as scheduled. Sound power-level rating of units shall be in accordance with ADC Standard 1062. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 3 2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts. B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation. C. Steel Cables: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603. D. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device. E. Air-Terminal-Unit Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct materials. F. Trapeze and Riser Supports: Steel shapes and plates for units with steel casings; aluminum for units with aluminum casings. 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory Tests: Test assembled air terminal units according to ARI 880. 1. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems." B. Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. 3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports." B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached. 1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete. 2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 4 3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes and for slabs more than 4 inches thick. 4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes and for slabs less than 4 inches thick. C. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports. D. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install piping adjacent to air terminal unit to allow service and maintenance. B. Hot-Water Piping: Connect heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, strainer, control valve, and union or flange; and to return with balancing valve and union or flange. C. Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 23 31 13 "Metal Ducts." D. Arrange inlet duct connection with the required length of straight duct section as required by unit manufacturer to achieve accurate readings at flow sensor. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION A. Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, and maximum and minimum factory-set airflows. Comply with requirements in Section 23 05 53 "Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for equipment labels and warning signs and labels. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for compliance with requirements. 2. Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist. 3. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper motor rotation and unit operation. 4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. C. Air terminal unit will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs AIR TERMINAL UNITS 23 36 00 - 5 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. END OF SECTION 23 36 00 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 1 SECTION 23 37 13 - DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Fixed-face register. 2. Louver-face diffuser. 3. Linear slot diffuser. B. Related Sections: 1. Section 23 33 00 "Air Duct Accessories" for volume-control dampers not integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles. 1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following: 1. Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings. 2. Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location, quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Provide products indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Price. 2. Anemostat. 3. Approved equal. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 2 2.2 GRILLES, REGISTERS, AND DIFFUSERS A. Fixed-Face Register RA: 1. Material: Steel. 2. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 3. Face Arrangement: 1/2-by-1/2-by-1/2-inch grid core. 4. Core Construction: Removable. 5. Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide. 6. Face: 24 by 24 inches with blank-offs to reduce grille opening to 12 by 12 inches where indicated on Drawings. 7. Damper Type: Adjustable opposed blade. B. Louver-Face Diffuser SA: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material: Steel. 3. Finish: Baked enamel, color selected by Architect. 4. Face Size: 24 by 24 inches. 5. Mounting: Surface or T-bar—refer to Drawings. 6. Pattern: Adjustable core style. 7. Dampers: Radial opposed blade. 8. Accessories: a. Square to round neck adaptor. b. Adjustable pattern vanes. c. Throw reducing vanes. d. Equalizing grid. e. Plaster ring. f. Safety chain. g. Wire guard. h. Sectorizing baffles. i. Operating rod extension. C. Linear Slot Diffuser SB: 1. Devices shall be specifically designed for variable-air-volume flows. 2. Material - Shell: Aluminum. 3. Material - Pattern Controller and Tees: Aluminum. 4. Finish - Face: Special finish as selected by Architect from manufacturer's catalog. 5. Finish - Pattern Controller: Baked enamel, black. 6. Slot Width: 1/2 inch. 7. Number of Slots: Three. 8. Length: 48 inches. 9. Accessories: Plenum, frame, and end caps as required for mounting in architectural metal ceiling. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES 23 37 13 - 3 2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70, "Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets." PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install diffusers and registers level and plumb. B. Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings, and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels, locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location. C. Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers. 3.2 ADJUSTING A. After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed, before starting air balancing. END OF SECTION 23 37 13 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 1 SECTION 26 05 29 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Steel slotted support systems. 2. Mounting, anchoring, and attachment components. 1.5 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of equipment supports. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field assembly. 1. Manufacturers: a. Allied Tube & Conduit. b. Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries. c. ERICO International Corporation. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 2 d. GS Metals Corp. e. Thomas & Betts Corporation. f. Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd. 2. Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to MFMA-4. 3. Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria. B. Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101. C. Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel hangers, clamps, and associated fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter. B. Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space s upports for EMT as required by NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. C. Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent in future without exceeding specified design load limits. 1. Secure raceways and cables to these supports with single-bolt conduit clamps using spring friction action for retention in support channel. 3.2 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this Article. B. Raceway Support Methods: In addition to methods described in NECA 1, EMT may be supported by openings through structure members, as permitted in NFPA 70. C. Strength of Support Assemblies: Select sizes of components so strength will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be weight of supported components plus 200 lb D. Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise indicated by code: CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 - 3 1. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners on solid masonry units. 2. To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners. 3. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS Type 19, 21, 23, 25, or 27) complying with MSS SP-69. 4. To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws. 5. Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate by means that meet seismic-restraint strength and anchorage requirements. E. Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing bars. END OF SECTION 26 05 29 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 1 SECTION 26 09 23 - LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following lighting control devices: 1. Lighting control system, including devices, components, and circuitry. 2. Wall-box dimmers and occupancy sensors. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each type of product to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. C. Provide wiring diagrams for lighting control system. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM A. Four- to Eight-Channel/Zone Systems: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Crestron #GL-IPAC-SW8 system or approved equal by Wattstopper. 2. Provide four- to 8-channel/zone (as called for), microprocessor-based control systems to control switching, 0- to 10-V dimming, and automatic devices for LED lighting. Wall- mounted lighting-control processor enabling user system programming via LED front panel and PC software, integrating occupancy sensing, daylight harvesting, and remote management. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 2 3. Automatic control based on natural light and presence of people within the space. Controller can accept input from up to 4 keypads, 1 touch-screen controller, 4 occupancy/vacancy sensors, and 4 photocell/daylight sensors. 4. Programmable control system with Ethernet port and connectivity to data network systems and building management systems. Programmable astronomical time clock for time-schedule control. 5. Preloaded program for user-friendly setup. 6. Power monitoring to track real-time energy usage. 7. Surface-mount metal enclosure. 8. Input/Output: a. Line-Power Inputs: 8 terminal blocks, 2 connections per channel, paralleled. b. Switch-Channel Outputs: 8 terminal blocks. c. 0- to 10-V Dimmer Outputs: Two 8-position terminal blocks for 8 dimmer channel outputs, Class 1 or 2. 9. Control Processor: Network-connected, dual bus programmable control processor for low-voltage controls, devices, and subsystems through multiple control interfaces. SNMP support with built-in firewall, NAT, and router. a. Integrates sensors and other low-voltage controls, devices, and subsystems through multiple control interfaces and data network. 10. Keypad Controls: a. Backlit, replaceable, engravable buttons with amber LED indicators, configured to fit in a standard single-gang box. b. Colors and faceplates selected by Architect at time of Submittal. 11. Occupancy/Vacancy Sensors (Type V): a. Basis-of-Design Product: Provide Crestron #GLS series or approved equal. b. Low-profile ceiling-mount, combination ultrasonic and passive-infrared technologies. c. 2000-sq. ft. coverage at 360 degrees. d. Adjustable sensitivity for vacancy and occupancy states separately. Enable and disable walk-through modes. e. Built-in ambient light recognition with external photo-sensor input. f. Grace occupancy feature, which will place system in automatic "ON" feature up to 90 seconds after automatic "OFF" feature is engaged upon expiration of grace period g. Adjustable timeout settings up to 30 minutes, set typically at 10 minutes unless noted otherwise. 12. Photocell/Daylight Sensors: a. Basis-of-Design Product: Crestron #GLS series or approved equal. b. Ceiling-mount, open-loop type. c. 60-degree control field of view. d. Center axis of 45 degrees from mounting surface. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 3 e. Light Sensitivity of 3–6,000 foot-candles. f. Light Level Ranges: 3–300, 30–3,000, or 60-6,000 fc. 13. Provide quantity of four- to eight-channel lighting control modules/systems as required to provide ON-OFF and dimming capabilities for each lighting control leg/zone indicated and to provide daylight harvesting/dimming for all light fixtures/rows located adjacent to windows at all rooms where a photocell is indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Wiring Method: Comply with Division 26 Section "Basic Materials and Methods." Minimum conduit size shall be 1/2 inch. B. Wiring within Enclosures: Comply with NECA 1. Separate power-limited and non-power- limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written instructions. C. Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. 3.2 LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEM A. Extend branch circuitry from panelboards to fixtures via lighting control modules. B. Program each lighting control panel as directed by the Architect and Owner. Allow for two programming revisions after initial program. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following field tests and inspections: 1. After installing time switches and sensors, and after electrical circuitry has been energized, adjust and test for compliance with requirements. 2. Operational Test: Verify operation of each lighting control device, and adjust time delays. B. Lighting control devices that fail tests and inspections are defective work. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES 26 09 23 - 4 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Lighting Control Systems: 1. Provide complete testing of programmed lighting control, and issue written test report. Provide one 2-hour programming and training session to Owner on complete operation and programming of lighting control. Coordinate training schedule with Owner's Representative. END OF SECTION 26 09 23 CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 1 SECTION 26 10 00 - BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A.Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE A.The following are specifically included without limiting the generality implied by these Specifications and Contract Drawings: 1.Raceway and boxes. 2.Wire and cable. 3.Wiring devices and wall plates. 4.Miscellaneous equipment. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A.Product Data: For the products listed in Part 2 of this Section. Submit in indexed brochure; do not combine with submittals for other Sections of Specifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A.Electrical components, devices, and accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B.Comply with NFPA 70. C.Comply with NECA 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A.Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1.General: Minimum size 3/4"; electrogalvanized steel. 2.ANSI C80.3. 3.Manufacturers: Allied Tube, Republic Conduit, Wheatland Tube Company. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 2 B.Flexible Metal Conduit: 1.General: Minimum size 3/4"; galvanized steel. 2.Wet and damp locations: Outer liquidtight and dusttight jacket required in locations where excessive moisture exists. 3.Manufacturers: Allied, O-Z Gedney, American Flexible Conduit. C.Fittings: 1.EMT Couplings and Box Connectors: a.General usage: Galvanized steel, setscrew type, with insulated throat. Die cast is not allowed. b.Wet and damp locations: Raintight and concrete-tight, compression type with steel compression nut, with insulated throat. 2.Flexible-Steel Conduit Connectors: a.General: Galvanized steel, setscrew lock or screw-in type, with insulated throat, UL-approved as grounding type. b.Wet and damp locations: Suitable terminal fittings approved for use with liquidtight flexible conduit. 3.Manufacturers: Arlington Industries, Inc.; Raco; O-Z Gedney; Appleton. D.Outlet Boxes: 1.Interior Wall/Ceiling: a.Galvanized sheet steel for exposed and opened ceilings. b.Galvanized sheet steel for recessed wall, equipped with appropriate plaster rings. c. Covers: 1)As required by device or equipment mounted on box. 2)Blank covers for boxes with no device or equipment mounted on box. d.Manufacturers: Appleton, Steel City, Raco. E.Pull and Junction Boxes: 1.Galvanized sheet steel. 2.Covers: a.Flat; attach with a minimum of four screws. b.Galvanized steel to match box. 3.Manufacturers: Same as outlet boxes. F.Sleeves: 1.Steel pipe sleeves: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends. 2.Sleeve seals: Modular sealing device, designed for field assembly, to fill annular space between sleeve and raceway or cable. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 3 a.Sealing elements: EPDM interlocking links shaped to fit surface of cable or conduit. Include type and number required for material and size of raceway or cable. b.Pressure plates: Carbon steel. Include two for each sealing element. c.Connecting bolts and nuts: Stainless steel of length required to secure pressure plates to sealing elements. Include one for each sealing element. d.Manufacturers: Advance Products & Systems, Inc.; Calpico, Inc.; Metraflex Co. 2.2 WIRE AND CABLE A.Available Manufacturer/Available Products: Provide as indicated below or as approved through the submittal process. B.Building Wire: 1.Conductor: Annealed, commercial-grade, 98% conductivity copper based on International Annealed Copper Standard; stranded for #12 and larger; #12 AWG minimum unless noted otherwise. 2.Insulation and usage: UL Type THHN/THWN-2, 600 volts, for all locations unless otherwise indicated on Contract Drawings or specified below. 3.Available Manufacturers: American Insulated Wire, Essex, General Cable, Southwire. C.Control Wire: 1.Conductor: Annealed, 98% conductivity, stranded copper; #14 AWG. 2.Insulation: UL Type THHN/THWN-2, 600 volts. 3.Available Manufacturers: American Insulated Wire, Essex, General Cable, Southwire. D.Splices and Terminations: 1.Splices: a.No. 10 AWG and smaller: Buchanan Splice Caps, Ideal Wire Nuts, 3M Scotchlok #2. b.No. 8 AWG and larger: Compression type; Burndy “KS” or equal by T&B, Dossert. 2.Terminations: a.Solid copper: Bare conductor under mechanical lugs. b.Stranded copper: Conductor direct where device or equipment has compression- type lugs. Use fork- or loop-type insulated terminations where equipment or device has screw terminations. E.Insulations: 1.Molded composition caps: Burndy. 2. Electrical tape: Scotch #33. 2.3 WIRING DEVICES A.Where Basis-of-Design Product is indicated below, provide named product or approved equal by one of the following Bryant, Cooper (Arrow-Hart), Hubbell, P&S, or Leviton. 1.Provide one manufacturer for each category, for entire Project. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 4 B.General: Color for switches and receptacles shall be gray with stainless-steel faceplates. C.Local Switches–General: 1.Ac type, slow make, slow break, 20 Amp, 120-277 volts, toggle operation, UL/Fed. Spec. 2.Pole as indicated on Contract Drawings. 3.Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT20AC1 series. D.Receptacles–General Usage: 1.General Requirements: a.Duplex, 2-pole, 3-wire grounding. b.20 Amp, 125 volts, 60 Hz. c.NEMA configuration: 5-20R. d.Parallel-blade, double-wipe contacts; NEMA grounding slot. e.UL-listed and meeting Federal Specification WC596. 2.Standard: a.Quick-connect “plugtail” type. b.Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT5362 series. 3.Ground-Fault Circuit Interrupters (GFCIs): a.Specification grade, feed through b.Trip level: 4 to 6 mA; trip time: .025 second nominal. c.Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #PT2095 series. 4.TVSS: a.Same as paragraph 2 above except TVSS. 5.Duplex tamper-resistant receptacle with two USB charging ports, 15-A rating. a.Basis-of-Design Product: P&S #TMB26USBLACC6. E.Wall Plates: 1.Interior for Recessed Outlet Boxes: a.General: 1)Satin-finished stainless steel; standard size. 2)Single multigang plate for multiple devices at one location. 3)Manufacturer: Same as devices. 2.Interior for Surface Steel Outlet Boxes: a.Galvanized sheet steel; rounded edges. b.Single multigang plate for multiple devices at one location. c.Manufacturer: Appleton, General Electric, Pyle National, Steel City, Universal. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 5 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A.Firestopping: 1.Firestopping putty shall be asbestos-free, 100% intumescent material, capable of maintaining an effective flame and gas barrier in compliance with the following requirements: a.Code approvals: BOCA, ICBO, SSBC, NFPA 101, and NFPA 70. b.Flame spread: 25 or less, ASTM E 84. c.Flame-resistance and hose stream tests: Rated "F" and "T" in accordance with ASTM 814 or UL 1479. 2.Manufacturer: HILTI; no substitutions. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES A.Conduit Usage: 1.Electrical metallic tubing: For all concealed interior dry locations except where rigid steel or flexible steel conduit is required. 2.Flexible Metal Conduit: a.Not over 6' in length. b.For connection to motors, 30" maximum length. c.For connections to equipment mounted on vibrating supports. B.Installation: 1.Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing: a.General Requirements: 1)Concealed within walls, ceilings. 2)Exposed in mechanical equipment rooms, electric rooms. 3)Exposed conduit must be installed parallel with floor, wall, ceiling lines. 4)Conduit shall not be supported from ceiling support wires or ceiling T-bar. 5)Maintain 6" minimum clearance from heat sources. 6)Plug openings until wire is installed. b.Field Modifications: 1)Cutting by hacksaw; ream. 2)Cut tapered threads into rigid steel conduits. 3)Bend without reduction in internal diameter. c. Mounting: 1)Support from building construction, not boxes or other conduits or pipes. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 6 2.Wall Outlet Boxes: a.Where required for outlet facility. b.Flush, recessed wherever possible except where specifically noted, surface-mounted. c.Support securely from building construction, not from raceway, using same devices as for conduit. d.Seal all unused openings. e.All boxes shall be accessible after completion of construction. 3.Pull and Junction Boxes: a.Where indicated on Contract Drawings or required except none permitted in finished rooms. b.Must remain accessible. None allowed above ceilings unless ceiling is lay-in type. c.Support securely from building construction, not from raceway, using same devices as for conduit. d.Seal all unused openings. 3.2 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION A.Wire: 1.In raceways. 2.Wire shall be run in continuous lengths, without splices except at an accessible box or conduit fitting. Wire shall be kept on reels while being pulled and shall not be laid on the ground. 3.All control-circuit conductors shall be tagged with identification numbers at each location, such as, motor starters. All wires shall be labeled at both ends. B.Type "MC" Cable: 1.For concealed lighting and receptacle branch circuits installed above accessible ceilings and in stud partitions. 2.Installation shall be in accordance with NEC and manufacturer's installation instructions. a.Support horizontal runs at maximum 6' intervals. Support vertical runs at maximum 2' intervals. b.Support within 12" of each box or cabinet. 3.Support shall be from building structure. 4.Cables shall not be in contact with conduit, ductwork, or piping of other trades; support minimum of 3" from hot-water lines. 5.Cables shall be routed so that they do not interfere with or reduce access to mechanical equipment or electrical junction boxes. 6.Cables shall be supported to allow a minimum of 3" above lay-in ceiling panels. 7.Provide termination boxes in ceiling space above panelboards. Wire shall be in conduit from panelboards to termination boxes. 8.Where sections of the armor are separated, stretched, or otherwise damaged during installation, the entire cable run shall be replaced. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 7 C.Circuiting: 1.Circuiting Arrangement: a.Circuit arrangements indicated on Contract Drawings with regard to electrical loading and design concept shall be followed completely. b.Actual circuit routing and grouping of circuits in common conduit shall be at the Contractor's option. c.Each lighting circuit and each receptacle circuit shall have individual neutral conductors. 2.Lighting Circuits: a.Switching control: As indicated on Contract Drawings. b.Circuiting: Approximately as indicated, minor variations permitted. 3.Receptacle Circuits: a.Circuiting: Approximately as indicated, minor variations permitted. b.Special receptacle circuits as indicated on Contract Drawings. 4.Power and Control Circuits: a.Provide power wiring and make all connections to disconnect switches, motor controllers, motors, etc., as indicated on Contract Drawings. b.Verify exact location of all motors, controllers, control devices, etc., before roughing. 5.Wiring Diagrams: a.Any wiring diagrams indicated on Contract Drawings for connecting equipment furnished by others are approximate and are for bidding purposes only. b. Obtain wiring diagrams, certified correct for the job, from respective contractors for all equipment and systems furnished by them. c.Install all work in accordance with certified wiring diagrams. 3.3 WIRING DEVICES A.Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under single, multigang wall plates. B.Mounting Heights: As indicated below unless specifically noted otherwise on Contract Drawings. 1.Duplex wall outlets: 18" above finished floor to centerline. 2.Wall switch: 48" above finished floor to centerline. 3.Fire-alarm audio/visual device: 80" above finished floor to bottom. 4.Fire-alarm pull-station device: 48" above finished floor to centerline. C.The location of any device box may be changed a distance of 10' from starting location, before device is actually installed, at no extra charge. CCC - ROOM 350D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS 26 10 00 - 8 D.Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque- tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. E.Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1.After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements. 2.Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above. 3.4 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A.Fire-barrier sealing: Provide at all conduit penetrations in fire walls. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 26 10 00 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 51 00 - 1 SECTION 26 51 00 – LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Lighting fixtures. 2. Lighting fixture supports. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. CCT: Correlated color temperature. B. CRI: Color-rendering index. C. LER: Luminaire efficacy rating. D. Lumen: Measured output of lamp and luminaire, or both. E. Luminaire: Complete lighting fixture. 1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture, arranged in order of fixture designation. Include data on features, accessories, finishes, and the following: 1. Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions. 2. Emergency lighting units including battery and charger. 3. Energy-efficiency data. 4. Life, output (lumens, CCT, and CRI). 5. Photometric data and adjustment factors based on laboratory tests, complying with IESNA Lighting Measurements Testing & Calculation Guides, of each lighting fixture type. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 51 00 - 2 a. Manufacturer Certified Data: Photometric data shall be certified by a manufacturer's laboratory with a current accreditation under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Installation instructions. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Luminaire Photometric Data Testing Laboratory Qualifications: Provided by manufacturers' laboratories that are accredited under the National Volunteer Laboratory Accreditation Program for Energy Efficient Lighting Products. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire - suppression system, and partition assemblies. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings or approved equal. 2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS A. Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures. B. Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges. C. Sheet Metal Components: Steel unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent warping and sagging. D. Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under operating conditions, and designed to permit maintenance without use of tools. Designed to prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during maintenance and when secured in operating position. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 51 00 - 3 E. Diffusers and Globes: 1. Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation. a. Lens Thickness: At least 0.125 inch minimum unless otherwise indicated. b. UV stabilized. 2. Glass: Annealed crystal glass unless otherwise indicated. F. Factory-Applied Labels: Comply with UL 1598. Labels shall be located where they will be readily visible to service personnel, but not seen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place. G. LED Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598 and UL 8750. H. Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. White Surfaces: 85 percent. 2. Specular Surfaces: 83 percent. 3. Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent. 4. Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent. 2.3 LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS A. Comply with Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for channel- and angle-iron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports. B. Single-Stem Hangers: 1/2-inch steel tubing with swivel ball fittings and ceiling canopy. Finish same as fixture. C. Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single fixture. Finish same as fixture. D. Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 10 gage. E. Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod. F. Hook Hangers: Integrated assembly matched to fixture and line voltage and equipped with threaded attachment, cord, and locking-type plug. 2.4 LED DRIVERS A. Description: Comply with ANSI C 82.11, designed for type and quantity of LEDs indicated. Drivers shall be designed for full light output unless dimmer or bi-level control is indicated: 1. End-of-life detection, signaling, and shutdown circuit. 2. Sound Rating: A. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs LIGHTING FIXTURES 26 51 00 - 4 3. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent. 4. Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better. 5. Module temperature-control protection. 6. Power Factor: 0.95 or higher. 7. Full five-year warranty. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Lighting Fixtures: 1. Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install lamps in each luminaire. B. Temporary Lighting: If it is necessary, and approved by Architect, to use permanent luminaires for temporary lighting, install and energize the minimum number of luminaires necessary. When construction is sufficiently complete, remove the temporary luminaires, disassemble, clean thoroughly, install new lamps, and reinstall. C. Lay-in Ceiling Lighting Fixtures Supports: Use grid as a support element. 1. Install ceiling support system rods or wires, independent of the ceiling suspension devices, for each fixture. Locate not more than 6 inches from lighting fixture corners. 2. Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members at or near each fixture corner with clips that are UL listed for the application. 3. Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated on reflected ceiling plans or center in acoustical panel, and support fixtures independently with at least two 3/4- inch metal channels spanning and secured to ceiling tees. D. Suspended Lighting Fixture Support: 1. Pendants and Rods: Where longer than 48 inches, brace to limit swinging. 2. Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit Fixtures: Suspend with twin-stem hangers. 3. Continuous Rows: Use tubing or stem for wiring at one point and tubing or rod for suspension for each unit length of fixture chassis, including one at each end. 4. Do not use grid as support for pendant luminaires. Connect support wires or rods to building structure. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Install labels with panel and circuit numbers on concealed junction boxes. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 1 SECTION 27 15 00 - COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. UTP cabling. 2. Cable connecting hardware. 3. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 4. Cabling system identification products. B. Scope of Work: 1. Provide all necessary computer-data-distribution-system cabling and other associated devices, components, and accessories as required for the system specified herein and as indicated in the Contract Drawings. 2. Provide horizontal copper cabling and outlets. 3. Provide Category 6 data jacks and Category 6, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cables to Category 6 voice/data outlets (RJ45). 4. Provide Category 6A data jacks and Category 6A, unshielded, twisted-pair, copper cable for each wireless access point. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International. B. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. C. IDC: Insulation displacement connector. D. LAN: Local area network. E. Outlet: A connecting point in the work area on which horizontal cable terminates to a jack. F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer. G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 2 1.4 REFERENCES A. The following industry standards are the basis for ALL of the structured cabling described in this document. This includes Category 6 Installation and Testing, Pathways and Spaces, and Grounding. The list is incorporated by this reference to them. If there is a conflict between applicable documents, the order below shall dictate the order of precedence in resolving the issue unless an enforceable local or national code is in effect. Note that specific reference is made to both the EIA/TIA 568-B.2.1 standard for category 6 cabling and the EIA/TIA 568-B.3 standard for Fiber Optics. 1. TIA/EIA—Pertinent Sections 2. TIA/EIA-568-B and B3, Commercial Building Telecommunication Cabling Standard 3. TIA/EIA-606-A, Administration Standard for the Telecommunication Infrastructure of Commercial Buildings 4. TIA/EIA-607-A, Commercial Building Grounding/Bonding Requirements 5. TIA/EIA-569-A, Commercial Building Standards for Telecom Pathways and Spaces 6. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) a. NFPA-70 National Electric Code (NEC) – 2002 (or later edition) 7. New York State Department of Labor Rules and Regulations. 8. OSHA (Standards 29 CRF) Telecommunications – 1910.268. 9. Underwriters Laboratory. B. National Electrical Safety Code Board of Fire Underwriters inspection is required for all new electrical construction work. Specific Cornell Fire and Safety requirements must be met. In the event of conflict between or among such codes/requirements, the more stringent will apply. 1.5 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet locations with location of power receptacles at each work area. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. At the time of Shop Drawings, submit applicable manufacturer’s literature, Shop Drawings, and Product Data to confirm the conformance to the Contract Documents. B. Product Data for each component specified including detailed manufacturer specifications. Include data on features, ratings, and performance. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components as needed. Show access and working-space requirements. C. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of transmission media certifying that the products furnished comply with requirements and that they have been coordinated with and accepted by manufacturer of connected equipment. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 3 D. Qualification data for firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Provide evidence of applicable registration or certification at time of contract award. No projection of certifications will be accepted. E. Collect and submit any accompanying identification attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. F. Submit, prior to testing, the most recent calibration reports for all testing devices used by the contractor performing the testing. Calibration reports older than those recommended by the cabling or device manufacturer will be rejected. G. Submit a label example, pertaining to this project, for approval prior to printing bulk labels. H. Final schedule of cables as specified in Part 3. I. As-Built Drawings: 1. As-built Contract Drawing shall be delivered to the Owner 2 weeks prior to occupancy for each Project phase. A set of as-built drawings shall be provided to the Owner in magnetic media form (CD/DVD) and utilizing CAD software t hat is acceptable to the Owner. The magnetic media shall be delivered to the Owner 2 weeks prior to occupancy for each Project phase. Provide as-built drawings with locations and cable paths. J. Project Record Drawings: 1. Submit at conclusion of the Project and include: a. Approved Shop Drawings. b. Plan Contract Drawings indicating locations and identification of work area outlets, nodes, closets, and backbone (riser) cable runs. c. Cross-connect schedules including entrance point, main cross-connects, intermediate cross-connects, and horizontal cross-connects. d. Labeling and administration documentation. e. Warranty documents for equipment. f. Copper certification test result printouts and CD. g. Operation and maintenance manuals. K. Test Reports--General: 1. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the complete existing data network at each building prior to starting work. 2. Provide a complete system test report (bound) of the additions and revisions to the existing data network. After the report is acceptable, upon Engineer’s review, the report shall be included in the Division 27 O&M manual. Also, the acceptable test report shall be submitted to the on compact disk in PDF format. 3. Refer to Article 3.6 of this Section for additional information. L. The Engineer’s approval of Shop Drawings, product data, and samples shall not relieve the Division 27 Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, product data, and samples. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 4 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, connections, and incidental items necessary to fully complete the work under this Contract for use, occupancy, and operation by the Owner. B. Unless specifically otherwise indicated by the documents or the CM/Owner, all equipment and materials required for installation under these specifications shall be new, unused, and without blemish or defect. Equipment and materials shall be products which will meet with the acceptance of the Authorities having jurisdiction over the work and as specified hereinbefore. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products listed and/or labeled by FM or UL or another testing laboratory, the products shall be so listed and/or labeled. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, a first-class standard article shall be provided. C. Where equipment of a substitute manufacturer differ from that specified and require different arrangement or connections from those shown or specified, it is the responsibility of the Contractor responsible for the substitution to modify the installation of the equipment/system to operate properly and in harmony with the original intent of the drawings and specifications. When directed by the Architect, this Contractor shall submit drawings showing the proposed substitute installation. If the proposed installation is accepted this Contractor shall make all necessary changes in all affected related work provided under his and other Sections including roughing-in connections by other Trades, conduits, supports, etc. All changes shall be made at no increase to the Contract amount or additional costs to the Owner. D. Contractor/Subcontractor Qualifications: The Contractor/Subcontractor shall have at least one Registered Communications Distribution Designer, RCDD, on staff that must be certified by the Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI). Cabling installation shall be performed by a minimum of two installers and all installers performing the Work of this Contract shall be manufacturer-certified installers with proof of a current certification. All installers must be approved by the Owner prior to contract award. E. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be Corning EWP Certified for at least 6 months at time of bid for fiber-optic installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. F. Contractor/Subcontractor shall be part of the manufacturer's Certified Installer list for at least 6 months at time of bid for Category 6 installations. Evidence of this certification must be presented to Owner with bid submission. G. Fiber-optic-trained technicians shall have attended an appropriate training program and have obtained a certificate as proof shall execute the fiber-optic tests. Such certificates may have been issued by any of the following organizations or an equivalent organization: 1. The manufacturer of the fiber-optic cable and/or the fiber-optic connectors, 2. The manufacturer of the test equipment used for the field certification, 3. Training organizations authorized by BICSI (Building Industry Consulting Services International with headquarters in Tampa, Florida) or by the ACP (Association of Cabling Professionals™) Cabling Business Institute located in Dallas, Texas. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 5 H. Inspect every cable reel to confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel. Reject any reels that do not comply with these criteria. I. Cable manufacturers shall be ISO 9001 registered. 1.8 WARRANTY A. Attention is directed to provisions of the General Requirements regarding the warranties for work under this contract. B. All materials, items of equipment, and workmanship furnished under this Section shall carry the standard warranty against all defects in material and workmanship. Any fault due to defective or improper material, equipment, workmanship, or design that may develop shall be made good, forthwith, by, and at the expense of this contractor for the work under his contract including all other damage to areas, materials, and other systems resulting from this failure. C. Materials and labor supplied will be warranted against defects for a period of not less than one year following final acceptance. Materials, equipment, and cable installations found to be defective, as judged by the Owner, within the one-year period will be replaced by the contractor at no charge to the Owner. The contractor is required to respond to a repair call no later than the next business day. D. Provide cable manufacturer's warranty naming CIT/Infrastructure Engineering as the Owner. 1.9 PRODUCT HANDLING A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect materials of this Project before, during, and after installation and to protect installed work and materials of all other trades. B. Replacements: In the event of damage, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary to the approval of the Engineer and at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Use all means necessary to coordinate with other trades and ensure that proper and adequate provision is made in the work of other Sections to accommodate installations of the work of this Section. B. Adjust the arrangements and locations of distribution frames, patch panels, and cross connects in telecommunication rooms to accommodate and optimize the arrangement and space requirements of the telephone switch and LAN equipment. C. Coordinate with and obtain review of cable characteristics and certification for use with the connected system equipment by the connected equipment manufacturers. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 6 D. Collect and submit any accompanying identification, if any, attached to every master reel of unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. Inspection of every reel should confirm that the cable manufacturer has ISO9001 certification, that there are no factory splices in any reel, and that only virgin materials were used in the manufacturing of each reel. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION A. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet from data room rack to outlet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet for patch cords and service loops. B. Cable slack shall be provided at each end of each cable to accommodate future work-area changes. 2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard. B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. C. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A and NFPA 70. 2.3 UTP CABLE A. Category 6 Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope "Systimax" #1071E or comparable product by one of the following: a. BerkTek Lanmark #1000. b. Panduit GenSpeed #6000. B. Category 6A Cable: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CommScope "Systimax" #1091B or comparable product by BerkTek Lanmark #10G2. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 7 2.4 CABLE HARDWARE A. Outlet Faceplates: 1. Work-area faceplates shall be compatible with modular jack inserts iconable and ivory in color. Faceplates shall have a covered designation strips that allow identifying each jack. Provide inserts that orient outlets to accept jack inserts at 45-degree exit. a. Product—No Substitution: Panduit "Mini-Com Executive" series #CBEEI. b. Refer to Contract Drawings for exact quantity, number of ports required, and location of faceplates. 2. Blanks shall be installed to all unused openings. B. Category 6 Jacks and Inserts: 1. TIA 568A termination procedures shall be observed. Verify with Owner’s Representative prior to install. 2. Cable jacket shall be maintained to the point of termination. 3. Pair twists shall be maintained to within .5" of termination. 4. Excessive slack shall be removed from cables so as to avoid overcrowding behind faceplates and exceeding recommended bend radius. 5. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ688TG. C. Category 6A Modular Jacks: 1. Product—No Substitution: Panduit #CJ6X88TG, T568A modular jack for Cat. 6A cables. 2.5 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 WIRING METHODS A. Conceal cables in raceway. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF CABLES A. Comply with NECA 1. B. General Requirements for Cabling: CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 8 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 5. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 7. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 8. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 11. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable. 12. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. B. Label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA -606-A and CIT Infrastructure standards. C. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project. D. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, entrance pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings, in software and format selected by Owner. CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 9 E. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Identification within Connector Fields in Wiring Closet: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 4. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label. F. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative: 1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection. a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration. 5. UTP Performance Tests: a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2: 1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). CCC – ROOM 330D RENOVATION CORNELL UNIVERSITY 1714 17067CDs COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 15 00 - 10 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss. 5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew. 6. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP and optical fiber systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed. a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network. B. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted. C. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. D. Prepare test and inspection reports. END OF SECTION 27 15 00